Manual Gl317x Rph2

Content
Instruction Manual
SF6 circuit- breaker

GL317X
With spring operating mechanisms
FK3- 5
This equipment contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas (SF6) covered by the Kyoto Protocol, which has
a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 22200.
SF6 should be recovered and not released into the atmosphere.
For further information on the use and handling of SF6, please refer to IEC 62271: High-Voltage
Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 303: Use and Handling of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6).
Administrator
AHT
10- 2013
First issue
23- 10- 2013
Compiled by
J. Bossu
Approved by
V. Texier
ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on
that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without
liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.
D1821EN/01
1/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
10- 2013
D1821EN/01
2/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Safety
Product safety sheets
Annexes
Technical data
Technical characteristics
Rating plate
Description and operation

General description of the circuit- breaker
L12- 0012EN/01
Description of the interrupting chambers
L12- 105EN/03
Pole operation (interrupting principle)
L13- 005EN/03
Operating device of circuit- breaker
L14- 006EN/03
SF6 gas monitoring
L20- 001EN/07
Packaging - Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage
10- 2013
L22- 051EN/01
D1821EN/01
3/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Installation
Erection general instructions
L30- 002EN/02
Tightening torques
L31- 001EN/02
Erection general procedures
L31- 003EN/02
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts
L31- 064EN/04
The installation procedure (advised), developed

below, imposes a lifting equipment with the following
characteristics :
NOTE : If it is impossible to obtain the advocated lifting equipment, one complementary installation procedure is supplied in annexes.
3,000 daN)
(minimum)
H+2m
H
H+1m
L31- 137EN/03
Supporting frame assembly
L31- 7137EN/01
Coupling of column and chambers

Tipping down the pole of the circuit- breaker
and vacuum operation
L31- 721EN/03
Installation of terminals with preparation

of contact surfaces
L31- 733EN/03
Installation of capacitors
L31- 748EN/01
Installation of stress- shields

on the interrupting chambers
L31- 7509EN/01
Lifting and positioning the pole
L31- 7606EN/03
Installation of operating device
L31- 7902EN/01
Continued on next page.
10- 2013
D1821EN/01
4/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Installation, continued
10- 2013
Connection the vacuum pump
L31- 853EN/03
Installing the synchronous device RPH2
L31- 871EN/02
RPH2 - Correspondence between C.B. poles and

the network phases and the phase measuring the
reference voltage
L31- 872EN/02
Vacuum operation
L31- 881EN/03
Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure

for using the pressure gauge (tool)
L31- 924EN/02
Pre- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa
L31- 951EN/05
Filling with SF6 gas
L32- 007EN/05
D1821EN/01
5/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Commissioning
L34- 011EN/06
Pre- commissioning inspections

Commissioning test report
RES 310 M EN/10
Commissioning check list

RPH2 maintenance
RES 310 M RPH2

EN
Acceptance criteria
CAEN 103 271/3/010
Maintenance
10- 2013
Maintenance plan
L51- 004EN/05
Electrical wear limits
L51- 053EN/03
Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection
L51- 108EN/05
Intervention on the operating device
L51- 304EN/04
D1821EN/01
6/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Annexes
Tooling and accessories
L60- 028EN/02
Product safety sheets

RPH2 - Outline drawing
RPH2 - Wiring diagram (2SA0)
PS0000/EN
58.001.115- 01
58.010.111- 16EN
RPH2 - Service manual
58.020.034 EN
Check- list Commissioning

maintenance RPH2
58.020.035- EN
End of equipment service life
10- 2013
Dismantling and recovery of components

from a circuit breaker
L80- 000EN/02
Managing of SF6 gas
L80- 001EN/02
Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas

and its secondary products
L81- 001EN/02
D1821EN/01
7/8
GRID
Content
Instruction Manual
Complementary installation procedure

3,000 daN)
(minimum)
The
complementary
installation
procedure,
developed below, imposes a lifting equipment with the
following characteristics :
H+2m
L31- 138EN/03
L31- 200EN/06
Installation of terminals with preparation

of contact surfaces
L31- 504EN/03
Installation of capacitors
L31- 605EN/02
Installation of stress- shields

on the interrupting chambers
L31- 664EN/02
L31- 7138EN/01
L31- 7902EN/01
Installation, continued
10- 2013
D1821EN/01
8/8
GRID
General description of the circuit-- breaker
Circuit-- breaker GL317X with spring operating mechanism FK3-- 5

Description
The circuit--breaker is made up of three poles, each activated by a spring

operating mechanism.
Diagram
Parts table
The table below gives the main parts of the circuit--breaker :

Mark
A
B
C
D
11--2012
Component
Pole of the circuit--breaker
Bearing structure
Operating device
Marshalling cubicle
Page
2
3
4
5
L12--0012EN/01
1/6
GRID
Pole of the circuit-- breaker

Description
Diagram
The pole of the circuit--breaker is made up with three main components :

S The interrupting chambers (1).
S The support column (2).
S The housing of the mechanism (3).
1
6
7
4
2
13
3
8
Interrupting
chambers
The pole is comprised of two interrupting chambers (1) -- in a ceramic envelope -- equipped at each end with a HV terminal (5).
The interrupting chambers are laid out horizontally and attached, at their
base, to a common housing (6). This housing contains the mechanism used
to transfer the operating movement to the mobile contacts of both chambers.
The interrupting can also be equipped with capacitors (7) and a corona ring
(4).
Support column
Consisting of two, three or four ceramic insulators, the support column allows
the circuit--breaker to be ground--insulated and it also encloses the operating
tie--rod which is attached to the interrupting chambers moving contacts.
The support column can also be equipped with a corona ring (13).
Housing of the
mechanism
A housing (3) -- situated at the base of the column -- contains the lever and
crank assembly and which operates the moving contact.
The SF6 filling and monitoring device (8) is also situated on the housing.
11--2012
L12--0012EN/01
2/6
GRID
Bearing structure
Description
The support--frame (10) -- made up with four supports fastened to the housing
(3) -- supports all the circuit--breaker components.
The support--frame may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customers.
Diagram
3
10
11--2012
L12--0012EN/01
3/6
GRID
Operating device
Description
Diagram
The operating device (11) is a spring operating mechanism of the FK3--5 type.
The door of the operating device (11) is equipped with two windows. These
windows permit to display the optical signalization of the circuit--breaker state
and closing spring state.
11
Fastening
11--2012
The operating device is fastened on the housing (3).
L12--0012EN/01
4/6
GRID
Marshalling cubicle
Description
The marshalling cubicle (D) is fastened on the ground near the central
pole. Included with :
S The relays required to operate the circuit--breaker.
S The interconnection terminals boards.
S The terminals boards.
Diagram
11--2012
L12--0012EN/01
5/6
GRID
11--2012
L12--0012EN/01
6/6
GRID
Presentation
Diagram
B
A
Parts table
The table below gives the main parts of the interrupting chambers :
Mark
A
B
01--2011
Component
Interrupting chamber
Upper housing
ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be
relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is
provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is
strictly prohibited.
Page
2
3
L12--105EN/03
1/4
GRID
Interrupting chamber
Quenching medium
The quenching medium is pressurized SF6 gas or -- in particular instances -pressurized SF6+CF4 gas mixture.
Interrupting principle
The interrupting chamber is of thermal blasting type, using the energy from
the arc, with an auxiliary autopneumatic effect.
Diagram
Description
The interrupting chamber has been designed in such a way as to increase the
mechanical resistance of the working part and take advantage of the low wear
rate of the contacts subjected to the arc in SF6. The working part is enclosed
in a leak tight ceramic envelope, providing insulation between the
circuit--breaker input and output.
The chamber is made up of the following elements :
Mark
(1)
(2)
(4)
01--2011
Component
Envelope
Fixed contact
Moving contact
Information
Can have a long creepage
distance, depending on the
pollution level.
It is worked by the operating
mechanism and contains the
blasting device.
L12--105EN/03
2/4
GRID
Upper housing
Description
The upper housing encloses the movement transfer mechanism (15) from the
operating tie--rod (8) to the moving contact (4) of the two chambers.
Diagram
15
Parts table
01--2011
The table below gives the housing internal and peripheral components :
Mark
(4)
Component
Moving contact
(8)
Operating tie--rod
(15)
Mechanism
Function
It is worked by the operating
mechanism and contains the blasting
device.
Transmits the movement to the moving
contact of the two chambers.
Transfer of the movement.
L12--105EN/03
3/4
GRID
01--2011
L12--105EN/03
4/4
GRID
Pole operation
(Interrupting principle)
Presentation
Introduction
In CLOSED position the current passes through :

-- the terminal (1),
-- the fixed contact support (2),
-- the main contacts (3),
-- the moving contact (4),
-- the moving contact support (5),
-- the common housing (6),
and follows the opposite chain on the other chamber and the terminal (1).
5
4
CIRCUIT--BREAKER CLOSED
""
In this module
KAPANI YAYI "DONATILMI"

CLOSING SPRING LOADED
This module contains the stages of the pole operation :

Stage
Page
2
5
Opening
Closing
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
1/6
GRID
Pole operation
Opening
Opening
When an electrical or manual opening order is given, the energy accumulated

in the opening spring (7) is released.
The insulating tie--rod (8), directly activated by the opening spring (7),
transmits the movement to the transfer mechanism (9) inside the housing
which causes the contacts to separate simultaneously in both chambers.
9
8
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
2/6
GRID
Pole operation
Opening, continued
Operation
The table below gives the stages of opening :

Stage
Start of opening
Description
When the moving contact (4) separates from the main
contacts (3), the current is switched onto the arc
contacts (10). The compression of the (Vp) volume
causes the first rise of pressure.
3
Thermal effect
10
When the contacts (10) separate, the arc appears and

its energy causes the pressure to rise in the thermal
expansion volume (Vt), closed by the fixed contact rod
(11) and the insulating nozzle (12).
11
Interrupting and
assistance
at opening
Vp
12
10
Vt
When the rod (11) comes out of the nozzle (12), the
thermal overpressure in the volume (Vt) is released
causing an energy blast to occur, just before the
current zero passage, ensuring final quenching of the
arc. The (Vp) volume pressure decreases to the
ambient pressure by means of the valve (13) to allow
the end of the opening.
11
12
Vt
Vp
13
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
3/6
GRID
Pole operation
Opening, continued
Molecular sieve
The arc has been extinguished.

The SF6 molecules, separated by the arc, are re--formed instantaneously.
Residual gases left over from the interruption operation are adsorbed by the
molecular sieve situated at the base of the pole. A few powdery compounds
are deposited in the form of dust which is quite harmless for the circuit
breaker.
Special case
of small currents
For small currents (example : operating no--load lines, transformers or

capacitor banks), the thermal energy of the arc is too low to provide enough
excess pressure.
Consequently, the conventional autopneumatic effect developing in the
volume (Vp) is used mainly, to blast the arc.
Vp
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
4/6
GRID
Pole operation
Closing
Description
When an electrical or manual closing order is given, the energy accumulated

in the closing spring (15) -- situated inside the operating device -- is released.
This energy is transmitted directly to the pole operating shaft (16), to ensure
closing.
The release of the energy stored up in the closing spring (15) causes
displacement of the moving parts -- and so the closing of the interrupting
chambers -- and also reloads the opening spring (7).
15
16
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
5/6
GRID
Pole operation
01--2011
L13--005EN/03
6/6
GRID
Operating device of circuit-- breaker
Presentation
Introduction
The operating device is a spring operating mechanism of type FK3--5.

The operating mechanism is usually electrically remote--controlled.
During commissioning or when auxiliary voltage is lacking, operations can
also be performed directly on the mechanism.
Warning
OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRESSURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULATION pme.
In this module
This module contains the following topics :

Topic
Page
2
3
5
Description of the mechanism

Auxiliary fittings
Operating principle
01--2011
L14--006EN/03
1/6
GRID
Description of the mechanism

Drive shaft
D The main shaft (1) is linked up to the the circuit--breaker pole by means
of a cylinder (2).
D A damper (4) is linked up to the lever (32).
D In the CLOSED position, the main shaft (1) rests on the opening latch
(6) by means of the lever (5).
D In the OPEN position, the lever with roller (11) rests on the closing
cam (10).
D The opening spring (3) activates the lever (33) by means of the chain
(34). This spring is a pressure helical type.
NOTE : The levers (5)--(11)--(32) (33) form one piece only.
Closing shaft
D On the closing shaft (7) are placed :

-- The inertia flywheel (8).
-- The closing cam (10).
-- The cam (26) that engages the limit switch (17) of the motor (12).
D The closing spring (9) activates the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the
chain (15). This spring is a pressure helical type.
The rotation torque -- created on the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the
loaded closing spring (9) -- is balanced by closing latch (14) / roller (16).
9
Diagram
15
17
34
33
30
2
1
32
11
12
11
33
32
5
16
14
10
31
26
34
11
01--2011
33
17
12
L14--006EN/03
2/6
GRID
Auxiliary fittings
Reloading the closing The closing spring (9) is loaded by means of the reducing gears (13) and the
spring
motor (12).
Auxiliary electric
fittings
D The auxiliary contacts (30) are activated by a rod and a lever (31), the latter is activated by the main shaft (1).
D The limit switch of the motor (17) is activated by the cam (26)
The cam (26) is installed on the closing shaft (7).
D The closing latch (14) and the opening latch (6) are electrically activated
by coils (22) Closing and (27) Opening.
Auxiliary mechanical
fittings
D The operating mechanism can be activated by the manual levers (24)

Closing and (28) Opening.
WARNING : Operating the mechanism by the manual levers (24) Closing
and (28) Opening overrides electrical interlocks. Ensure it is electrically safe
to operate the equipment when using these levers to defeat electrical interlocks and lockouts.
D The indicator (29) gives the OPEN or CLOSED positions of the circuit--breaker. An operation counter (36) gives the number of realized operations.
D The indicator (23) gives the CHARGED or DISCHARGED states of the
closing spring.
D If the auxiliary current supply fails, the hand--held crank (21) permits the
closing spring to be fully charged.
Diagram
9
30
17
34
1
23
29
12
26
14
21
01--2011
27
13
31
28
22
24
L14--006EN/03
3/6
GRID
Operating principle
Warning
OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
Closing
D When the closing coil is energized or the manual closing lever is operated,
the closing latch (14) releases the inertia flywheel (8).
D The closing shaft (7) effects a 180 rotation generated by the loaded closing spring (9).
D The cam (10) rotates the main shaft (1) by means of the lever with roller
(11). After a 60 rotation, the lever (5) rests on the opening latch (6).
D Simultaneously, the opening spring (3) is loaded by means of the chain (34)
activated by the rotation of the lever (33).
D A freewheel, installed on the gear wheel (19), avoids the reducing gears
(13) and the motor (12) being driven by the gear wheel of the inertia flywheel
(8).
NOTE : A mechanical device (not shown) prevents all closing operations if the circuit--breaker is already in the CLOSED position.
Diagram
9
34
33
1
6
8
5
12
10
22
13
19
14
27
11
28
24
01--2011
L14--006EN/03
4/6
GRID
Operating principle, continued

Reloading the closing D When the motor (12) is supplied with current, it immediately starts to load
spring
the closing spring (9) by means of the reducing gears (13) of the inertia flywheel (8) and the chain (15).
D At the full stroke, the gear (19) is at the no tooth sector of the inertia flywheel
(8) and the reducing gears (13) can decelerate without causing strain on the
closing latch (14).
NOTE : During the loading of the closing spring, the supplying circuit
of the closing coil is cut to avoid an untimely closing operation.
Diagram
9
15
8
8
14
12
13
19
19
01--2011
L14--006EN/03
5/6
GRID
Operating principle, continued

Opening
D When the opening coil (27) is energized or the manual opening lever (28)
is operated, the opening latch (6) releases the lever (5).
D The main shaft (1) effects a 60 clockwise rotation -- generated by the
loaded opening spring (3) -- before reaching the circuit--breaker OPEN position.
D A damper (4) dampens the excess energy to smoothly finish travel.
Diagram
3
60
1
6
4
27
28
01--2011
L14--006EN/03
6/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Presentation
Introduction
The circuit--breaker uses pressurized SF6 gas as electric arc quenching gas.
The SF6 gas pressure monitoring is essential to assure the circuit--breaker
performances.
Principle
There is two SF6 gas pressure monitoring types :

D Permanent monitoring with the help of a threshold densimeter.
D Periodic monitoring with the help of a dial densimeter (visual control)
Symbols
IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol
pre
pae
pme
In this module
Designation
Filling rated pressure for the insulation
Alarm pressure for the insulation
Minimal pressure for the insulation

Topic
Page
2
3
4
5
Gas pressure and density

Pressure measurement
Measuring density
Densimeter
01--2011
L20--001EN/07
1/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Gas pressure and density

Introduction
The electrical characteristics of switchgear depend on the density of SF6 gas

i.e. the mass of gas pumped into a compartment of a given volume.
Constant
temperature
At constant temperature, an increase of gas density results in a higher gas

pressure against the walls of compartment.
Constant density
At constant density, with an fixed compartment volume, the pressure

changes in the same way as the temperature. Since the gas density
remains invariable owing to the fact that no modification occurs in the
quantity of gas or the volume of the relevant compartment, the electrical
characteristics of the switchgear will remain unchanged.
Conclusion
Since it is difficult to measure the gas density directly, it is essential to

know accurately its absolute pressure and temperature.
01--2011
L20--001EN/07
2/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Pressure measurement
Effective pressure ?
Absolute pressure ?
Absolute pressure = effective pressure + atmospheric pressure
Pressure
Effective
Absolute
01--2011
Description
Diagram
The pressure of SF6 gas is
Standard pressure gauge
measured by of a standard
pressure
gauge
with
a
deformable diaphragm actuating
an indicating pointer.
One surface of the diaphragm is
in contact with the SF6 gas, while
the other is in contact with the
atmosphere. The difference
between the gas and the
atmosphere is thus measured,
taking atmospheric pressure as a
reference.
This
is
the
SF6
measurement of the effective
pressure of the SF6 gas.
Atmospheric pressure
If the deformable diaphragm, one
Absolute
surface of which is in contact with
pressure gauge
the SF6 gas, blocks a volume
where a vacuum has been
developed, the pressure gauge
measures
the
pressure
difference between that of the
SF6 gas and the vacuum. Since
the latter is zero, the pressure
gauge measures the absolute
pressure of the gas.
The absolute pressure of the SF6
gas, independent of atmospheric
pressure, reflects the quantity of
SF6
gas
introduced
into
the
compartment and hence its
Vacuum volume
density
at
the
present
temperature.
This is measured by means of an
absolute pressure gauge which
is less generally used and more
delicate than a effective pressure
gauge. This is the reason why a
effective pressure gauge is used,
provision being made for
by
corrections
required
atmospheric pressure variations
atmospheric
resulting
from
disturbances and differences of
elevation.
L20--001EN/07
3/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Measuring density
Pressure units
D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).

D The practical unit is the bar (14.503 p.s.i.)
1 bar = 1,000 hPa
1 bar = 100 kPa
10 bar = 1 MPa
D Standard atmospheric pressure is equal to 101.3 kPa at sea level and an
air temperature of 20C (68F).
Measuring density
When it is not possible to directly measure density, this may be checked

using an industrial pressure gauge capable of measuring the effective
pressure.
An effective pressure value corresponds to the rated density, determined
for normal atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) and an ambient temperature
of 20C (68F).
For each pressure reading (filling, inspection of densimeter thresholds...), the
rated effective pressure should be corrected according to the ambient
temperature and atmospheric pressure of the site at the time the reading is
taken. See the module Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure to
using the pressure gauge (tool).
The real pressure is therefore :
Preal = Prated effective in accordance with temperature + Pp*

* Pp : correction in accordance with atmospheric pressure.
01--2011
L20--001EN/07
4/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Densimeter
Function
D Permanent SF6 gas density monitoring.

D Visual SF6 gas real pressure information (MPa -- psi).
Localization
The densimeter is situated onto the bottom of the pole of the circuit--breaker,
and joined to the gas volume of the circuit--breaker.
Working
The densimeter is fitted with internal contacts. These contacts close

successively if the gass density diminishes and determine 2 distinct
thresholds. These contacts are wired to the terminal block inside the cubicle
and are usually left at the users disposal for the following use :
D Alarm pressure pae acts as a warning (topping up necessary).
D Minimum functional pressure for insulation pme must be used either to
lock the circuit--breaker in position or to cause automatic opening. The option
is chosen by the client in keeping with operating requirements.
All the circuit--breakers rated performances are guaranteed up to the
minimum specified ambient temperature and the minimum functional
pressure for insulation pme.
01--2011
L20--001EN/07
5/6
GRID
SF6 gas monitoring
Densimeter, continued
Reading the dial
The dial is divided into three colored areas : Green, Yellow and Red. The
position of the needle indicates the SF6 gas absolute pressure value.
-1
0
Needle position
Colored area
Direction
GREEN
None
YELLOW
Perform a topping--up
operation.
RED
01--2011
Abnormally low density,

find the origin of the
leak and contact
ALSTOM Grid
After--sales Service.
L20--001EN/07
6/6
GRID
Packaging -- Shipping and storage
Presentation
Information
The different parts of the poles (chambers and column) are filled with nitrogen
(N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20C
(68F).
In this module

Topic
Packaging
Identifying sub--assemblies and their packaging
Storage
11--2012
Page
2
3
4
L22--051EN/01
1/6
GRID
Packaging
Introduction
For transport, the different parts of the apparatus are divided--up between
several cases :
S Interrupting chambers + (corona rings chambers).
S Columns + (corona rings, electrical connections ...).
S Operating devices : each operating device is wrapped in a protective bag.
S Frames if the latter is supplied by ALSTOM Grid.
S The SF6 bottle(s) or -- in particular instances -- SF6 bottle(s) and CF4
bottle(s).
S Marshalling cubicle.
S Assembly products (grease, oil, etc.) used for installation.
S Capacitors (if the apparatus is equipped with these).
Characteristics of
packaging cases
The table below gives the characteristics of the circuit--breaker components

packaging cases depending on the apparatus :
Packaging case type

Interrupting chambers
x 3
Interrupting chambers
with resistors *
x 3
Columns
(2 insulators)
Columns
(3 insulators)
Columns
(4 insulators)
Frame
(H = 2503 mm)
Frame
(H = 3377 mm)
Frame
(H = 4877 mm)
Operating device
SF6 gas
(SF6+CF4) SF6 gas
gas
CF4 gas
mixture
Marshalling cubicle
Necessities (products)
for assembly
Capacitors *
Qty
Length
cm
Width
cm
Height
cm
Gross weight
kg
513
181
136
706
218
133
503
188
108
532
191
105
627
191
105
308
96
96
396
96
96
546
96
96
102
85
128
131
76
172
284
60
60
70
37
266
141
124
*
*
*
* Depending of the apparatus

NOTE : the values in the above table are given as an indication so
that an appropriate means of lifting can be envisaged.
11--2012
L22--051EN/01
2/6
GRID
Identifying sub--assemblies and their packaging

Introduction
Each circuit--breaker sub--assembly (poles, operating mechanism, etc.) is

identified by a plate giving its reference numbers.
These numbers are marked on the packaging cases of each sub--assembly.
Example of marking
and identifying
-- Manufacturer reference No. = 101 525

-- Circuit--breaker identification No. 1
-- Pole No. 2
IDENTIFICATION OF
SUB--ASSEMBLIES AND
TOOLING
MARKING OF
PACKAGING CASES
MANUFACTURER
REFERENCE No.
101 525 0010

0101
101 525 0010

no SRIE
Rep. 01/2
CASE No.
POLE No.
CIRCUIT--BREAKER
IDENTIFICATION No.
Place of the plates
Choose and install the components identified by the plate (1).

101 525 0010
no SRIE
Rep. 01/2
1
OUTSIDE PLATE
INSIDE PLATE
11--2012
L22--051EN/01
3/6
GRID
Storage
Introduction
The storage procedures defined below are for storage times of less than 2
years. For longer periods, special packaging must be designed and appropriate procedures devised.
Short--term storage
(6 months)
The apparatus must be stored in its transport packaging and placed on beams
in a flood--proof place.
Medium--term storage The table below indicate how to stock the main components of the circuit-(less than 2 years)
breaker for a medium--term storage :
Component
Components
of the circuit--breaker pole
Operating device
Storage
The apparatus must be stored with its
transport packaging open whilst
placed on beams in a closed (indoor),
but ventilated, flood--proof place.
The operating device should be
stored in the same place as the circuit--breaker, these two sub--assemblies being inseparable. Check that
the packaging is leak--tight.
If this has been damaged, proceed as
follows :
S The operating device should be
placed so that air can enter through
the vents of the rear plate and side
panels.
S In order to prevent corrosion
damage due to formation of
condensation, it is mandatory that the
heating circuit be switched on.
11--2012
L22--051EN/01
4/6
GRID
Storage
Centralizing cubicle
The centralizing cubicle should be

stored in the same place as the circuit--breaker and the operating
device, these three sub--assemblies
being inseparable.
S In order to prevent corrosion
damage due to formation of
condensation, it is mandatory that the
heating circuit be switched on. Put
vetically the centtralizing cubicle for
that air can enter through the vents.
ANY CHANGE OF LOCATION OF THE APPARATUS (EVEN AFTER COMMISSIONING) SHOULD BE DONE AT A REDUCED PRESSURE OF
0.03 MPa.
11--2012
L22--051EN/01
5/6
GRID
11--2012
L22--051EN/01
6/6
GRID
Installation

Instructions
of environment
The table below gives the instructions of environment to respect for the
erection :
Instruction
Erection
instructions
Comment
Verify the Civil engineering work : dimensions,

levels of concrete pads (structure fixation), in
accordance with the tolerances given by Civil
work standards (refer to circuit--breaker
outline).
Avoid any dust production and masonry work

during erection of the circuit--breaker.
The table below gives the instructions to respect for proper erection of the
circuit--breaker :
Instruction
Comment
Read all the Installation modules completely

before beginning erection works.
The erection instructions describe all the
procedures to be carried out as well as their
chronological order.
Handle sub--assemblies in a correct manner,

particularly insulators.
The shipping case should be open as required

during erection procedures.
Respect
sub--assemblies
CAUTION :
identification.
When shipping covers are removed, proceed to

the next assembly sequence in as short as
possible time.
Store the shipping covers under shelter, for a
possible future use.
Respect references to
i.e. :Tightening torques.
other
modules,
Warning
No responsibility is taken over by ALSTOM Grid for damages and

disturbances resulting out of non--adherence to the Installation modules.
01--2011
L30--002EN/02
1/2
GRID
Installation
01--2011
L30--002EN/02
2/2
GRID
Installation
Tightening torques
Presentation
Introduction
In the assembling with screws, all the fastening screws must be greased
before torque tightening.
Products used
The table below gives the list of the used products for the screws before
tightening :
Designation
Grease
Contact grease
Silicon grease
Glue
In this module
ALSTOM Grid
item
reference
--01835208
(1kg box)
--01835118
(200g tube)
--01835265
(100g tube)
--01818327
(250 ml)
Supplier
MOBIL OIL
EPMF
Supplier item
reference
MOBILPLEX 47
MOBILUX EP3
CONTACTAL
HPG
SAMARO
MOLYKOTE 111
LOCTITE
LOCTITE 225

Topic
Screw greasing before tightening
Tightening torques values
01--2011
Page
2
3
L31--001EN/02
1/4
GRID
Installation
Tightening torques
Screw greasing before tightening

Choice of the
product to use
The table below gives the product to use for the screws before tightening
depending on the assembling type :
If assembling...
usual
electrical connections
with seals
Where to apply
the product ?
Product to use ...

MOBILPLEX 47
MOBILUX EP3
CONTACTAL HPG
Can be
dismantled ?
YES
NO
Product ...
MOLYKOTE 111
LOCTITE 225
The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate
product before tightening depending on the assembling type :
If assembling...
With screws
With bolts
usual
Tapping or threading
with seals
01--2011
L31--001EN/02
2/4
GRID
Installation
Tightening torques
Tightening torques values

Values table
The tool and the tightening method must be such that the torque actually
applied to the screw head corresponds with the reference torque shown in the
table below, to within a tolerance of 20%.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
in daN.m
STEEL SCREWS
01--2011
CLASS 6.8
or
STAINLESS A2--70, A4--70
STAINLESS A2--80, A4--80
CLASS 8.8
M2,5
0,05
0,06
M3
0,09
0,11
M4
0,19
0,26
M5
0,38
0,51
M6
0,66
0,88
M8
1,58
2,11
M10
3,20
4,27
M12
4,97
6,63
M14
8,67
11,56
M16
13,42
17,90
M20
26,22
34,98
M24
45,68
60,93
M30
90,44
120,65
L31--001EN/02
3/4
GRID
Installation
Tightening torques
01--2011
L31--001EN/02
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Introduction
During the erection of the circuit--breaker, some particular mounting or

checking operations will be realized.
In this module

Topic
Preparing and installing static seals
Screw sealing
Using a water pressure gauge
01--2011
Page
2
3
5
L31--003EN/02
1/6
GRID
Installation
Preparing and installing static seals

Necessary products
Process
List of the ALSTOM Grid products necessary for the installing :

ALSTOM
Diagram
Designation
Grid
reference
--01861262
Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)
--01835265
MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)
The table below gives the steps of installing static seals :

Step
1
2
4
5
Action
Clean bearing grooves and
surfaces using ISOPROPANOL.
Rid the seal of all foreign bodies
such as paintbrush bristles or
filings...
Remove (where applicable) the
color identification point with
fingernail, never with a sharp
instrument.
Lightly lubricate the seal by hand
using MOLYKOTE 111 grease.
Check the condition of the seal

which should present no
scratches or deformation (it
should be neither flattened,
stretched, nor broken).
Do not use a brush to do this.

Eliminate excess grease by
squeezing the seal between
fingers, leaving only a thin layer
on the entire surface.
Put the seal(s) in place.

Lubricate both bearing surfaces Do not put grease on the inside
with MOLYKOTE 111.
surface.
Fill the residual volume of the
seals outside groove with grease.
Greasing
zone
01--2011
Comment
Only seals are

greased in this
zone
Greasing
zone
L31--003EN/02
2/6
GRID
Installation
Screw sealing
Introduction
To prevent humidity from penetrating SF6 gaskets, the outer mounting screws
should be sealed by applying an appropriate product.
NOTE : This procedure should be applied to all assemblages of parts
submitted to SF6 pressure and electrical connection assembling.
Necessary products
List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the screw
sealing :
ALSTOM
Grid
reference
Choice of the
product to use
Diagram
Designation
--01818327
LOCTITE 225 (250ml)
--01835265
MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)
--01835118
CONTACTAL HPG (200g tube)
The table below gives the product to use for the screw sealing depending on
the assembling type :
If assembling...
with seals
Product to use ...

Can be
dismantled ?
YES
NO
Product ...
MOLYKOTE 111
LOCTITE 225
CONTACTAL HPG
01--2011
L31--003EN/02
3/6
GRID
Installation
Screw sealing, continued

Where to apply
the product ?
The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate
product before tightening depending on the assembling type :
Assembling with screws
Assembling with bolts
01--2011
L31--003EN/02
4/6
GRID
Installation
Using a water pressure gauge

Introduction
In each assemblage performed using a double seal (1) and (2), the volume
(3) communicates with the outside by a channel (4), blocked--off by a plug (5)
or (6), so that leak--tightness can be checked.
1
3
2
4
Process
The table below gives the steps of the leak--tightness checking using a water
pressure gauge :
Step
1
Action
Remove the leak test plug (5) or (6)
and its seal (7) if necessary, leave
open for half an hour.
Diagram
7
2...3 turns
2
Connect up the water pressure gauge

(8), using the adapter (9) or (10).
10
8
9
Fill the water pressure gauges U tube

to half way up.
NOTE : If temperature is less
than 0C, use an anti--freeze mixture instead of water.
D After a few minutes note the water
column level R1.
D Note the water column level R2
again after half an hour.
The displacement H should be less
than 10 mm.
At the end of the inspection, pull the
adapter of the water pressure gauge
and replace the leak test plug (5) or (6)
and its seal (7), where required.
5
H
R2
R1
7
6
01--2011
L31--003EN/02
5/6
GRID
Installation
01--2011
L31--003EN/02
6/6
GRID
Installation
Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2)

in pole parts
Presentation
Introduction
The pole parts (chambers and columns) are filled with nitrogen (N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20C.
It is of prime importance that the presence of N2 gas in pole be verified
before going any further with installation.
Necessary tools
List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the checking for presence of N2
gas in poles :
Mark
(3)
In this module
Diagram
Designation
Number
Filling tool

Topic
Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns
Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers
04- 2013
ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied
on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided
without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly
prohibited.
Page
2
4
L31- 064EN/04
1/4
GRID
Installation

in pole parts
Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns
Opening the case of
the columns
Remove only the cover of the case. Remove packaging protection , to

free the housing (7) of the column.
NOTE : Keep the packaging protection
for later utilization.
Visual inspection
of the column
Begin visual inspection to check the condition of ceramic envelopes. Make

sure that their enamel has not been chipped or in any way damaged during
transportation.
04- 2013
prohibited.
L31- 064EN/04
2/4
GRID
Installation

in pole parts
Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns, continued
Process
The table below gives the steps of manual checking for presence of N2 gas
in columns :
Step
1
Action
Remove the plug (1) and install
the filling tool (3), tighten the
filling tool BY HAND.
Diagram
1
2
Unscrew the valve- cap (4) and

press on the valve briefly :
some gas should escape.
If no gas is expelled, contact
our Customer Service.
4
3
D Replace the valve- cap (4)

and remove the filling tool (3).
D Re- install the plug (1), applying a tightening torque of
4 daN.m; leaktightness is
only guaranteed if this condition is respected.
04- 2013
prohibited.
L31- 064EN/04
3/4
GRID
Installation

in pole parts
Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers
Comment
A transport cover (5) is installed on the housing (6) common to both interruption chambers. This cover is equipped with a test valve, in turn protected by
a plug (8).
6
5
Process
The table below gives the steps of checking for presence of N2 gas in the interrupting chambers :
Step
1
Action
Remove the plug (8) by undoing
the screws (9) and briefly press on
the valve clapper (7) : some gas
should escape.
Diagram
7
8
9
If no gas is expelled, contact

our Customer Service.
Re- install the plug (8) using the

screws (9).
9
8
x 2
H M6- 20
0,7 daN.m
04- 2013
prohibited.
L31- 064EN/04
4/4
GRID
Installation
Support-- frame assembly
Presentation
Reminder
Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.
In this module

Topic
Components necessary for the operation
Support--frame components (per pole)
Preparing the column
Frame--support assembly
Installing the lifting tools
06--2011
Page
2
3
5
6
10
L31--137EN/03
1/10
GRID
Installation

Necessary product
Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).
Necessary tools
List of the tools necessary for the installing :

Mark
(1)
Handling
06--2011
Diagram
Designation
Number
Lifting strap
(3 m)
The support--frame assembly operations and lifting

the pole should be performed by at least two persons.
L31--137EN/03
2/10
GRID
Installation

Introduction
If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary

components to the assembling.
Necessary
components
List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling :

Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(2)
Support
(3)
Support
(5)
Screws
H M16-45
(7)
Screws
H M16-35
16
(9)
Washer
NORDLOCK NL16 SS
16
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
3/10
GRID
Installation
Support--frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary
components,
continued
Mark
06--2011
Diagram
Designation
Number
(20)
Screws
H M16-45
16
(21)
Strengthening piece
(24)
Strengthening piece
(25)
Strengthening piece
L31--137EN/03
4/10
GRID
Installation

Dismantling the case
of the poles
Remove the side panels of the case.

NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and
C.
Preparing the pole
D Sling the A column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).
D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover
laying :
-- first, the end of the column,
-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure
the correct installing of the frame supports.
X minimum = 260 mm
1
1
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
5/10
GRID
Installation
Process
The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :
Step
1
Action
With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support
(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)
and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).
-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.
10
x1
2x2
7
5
H M16--45
H M16--35
2
10
2x2
7
H M16--35
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
6/10
GRID
Installation
Frame--support assembly, continued

Process, continued
Step
3
Action
Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support
(2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the
supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the
frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).
x4
20
3
21
4
25
H M16--45
10
2x2
7
2
H M16--35
5
10
3
2x2
7
H M16--35
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
7/10
GRID
Installation

Process, continued
Step
6
Action
21
3
2x2
20
25
21
25
2
7
H M16--45
Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with

the use of the screws (20).
x2
20
H M16--45
24
24
x2
20
24
24
H M16--45
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
8/10
GRID
Installation

Process, continued
Step
8
Action
Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.
18 daN.m
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
9/10
GRID
Installation
Installing the lifting tools
Necessary tools
Process
List of the lifting tools to install on the frame :

Diagram
Designation
Mark
Number
(14)
Lifting shackle
(15)
Ring bolt
(16)
Washer
The table below gives the steps of installing the lifting tools on the support-frame :
Step
1
2
Action
Install the lifting shackle (14) in the holes of the frame.
Install the ring bolts (15) on the base of the frame, inserting the thick
washers (16).
14
x4
16
15
06--2011
L31--137EN/03
10/10
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Markings
Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the
breaking chambers correspond with those on the column
Time taken for

coupling operation
The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in a

time of 40 min.
NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a minimum of two people.
T(max) 40 min
Lifting means
Provide an adequate means of hoisting:

3,000 daN (minimum)
H+2m
H
H +1 m
Stages of the
coupling operation
The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a number of stages:
Step
A
B
C
Subject
Positioning the chamber casing
Preparing the breaking chambers
Preparing the columns corona shield
Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation
Hoisting and preparing the column
Final coupling
09- 2011
prohibited.
Page
2
3
4
5
7
8
L31- 7137/EN01
1/18
GRID
Installation
Positioning the chamber casing

Introduction
To facilitate pole hoisting and to improve working safety it is indispensable that

the casings be positioned correctly with respect to the lifting equipment.
Positioning
the casing
Using the appropriate lifting equipment, position the chamber casing so that:
S The centreline of the chambers is perpendicular to the plane of the lifting
equipment,
S The distance between the casing and the lifting equipment is greater than
the total length of the column fitted to the chassis L + 2 m.
NOTE: The cradle on the first chamber will be used in the columnchamber coupling for all three circuit breaker poles
Illustration
L+2m
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
2/18
GRID
Installation
Preparing the breaking chambers

Removing the
chamber casing
Remove the side panels and cover from the case.
Rotating
the chambers
Using two flexible slings, swing the chambers through 180 then level the
transport covers.
NOTE: Turn the breaking chamber casing (2) so that the face
with the two humps is facing the lifting equipment.
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
3/18
GRID
Installation

Elements required:
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole):

Mark
Assembly
Illustration
Description
Quantity
(50)
Corona shields
(51)
Lugs
(52)
Fittings
H M10-30
Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) without
overtightening.
51
50
x 4
52
Positioning
H M10- 30
Temporarily position the corona shield (50) and lugs (51) on the casing (2).
50
51
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
4/18
GRID
Installation

Elements required:
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation:

Mark
(20)
(21)
Illustration
Description
Quantity
Seal
Screws
H M16- 65 (19 mm)
H M16- 75 (30 mm)
(22)
Washer
M16
16
(23)
Nut
(24)
Coupling pin
(25)
Circlips
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
5/18
GRID
Installation
Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation (continued)

Tools required
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation:

Mark
Products required
09- 2011
Illustration
Description
Quantity
(30)
(31)
Short centring pin

Long centring pin
(32)
Lever
(33)
Protective mask
(34)
Trolley stop
(35)
Fitting tool for

coupling pin
(36)
(80 cm)
Rigid electrical wiring cable
(37)
Circlip clamp
(not supplied).
S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces

S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place
S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
6/18
GRID
Installation
Hoisting and preparing the column

Tools required
List of tools required:

Mark
Illustration
(45)
Instructions
Quantity
Hoisting strap
(3 m)
The following table shows the steps to follow when lifting the column:
Step
1
09- 2011
Description
Action
Fit the lifting straps (45) to the
ends of the chassis feet
Lift the column
Hold the column suspended

to give access to its lower
end.
Illustration
45
prohibited.
x4
L31- 7137/EN01
7/18
GRID
Installation
Final coupling
Orientation of
column
Rotate the column (1) so that the control mount (3) is the same side as the
two humps on the breaking chamber casing (2).
3
1
Assembling
the centring pins
Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in place
so that they may be easily removed later on.
NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).
A
Depressurizing
the chambers
30
31
S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6)
to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers.
REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 20C
(101.3 kPa).
S Refit the cap (5).
5
6
4

09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
8/18
GRID
Installation
Final coupling, continued

Removing the
chamber transport
cover
The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:
Step
1
Action
Remove the fixings (40) and
insert the lever (32) through
the bracket rings (7).
Pull on the lever (32) to open
the cover (4).
Hold on two two of the cover
bolts (40) for later use.
Illustration
x 8
4
7
40
H M16- 55
32
Start timing.
(The final chamber/column
coupling operations should
be completed within
40 min).
Pull off the cover (4) to free

the stop ring (8) and rilsan
collar (9).
4
9
Fit the protective cover (33).
33
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
9/18
GRID
Installation

Removing the
chamber transport
cover
Step
5
Action
Using wire cutters, cut
through the Rilsan collar (9)
holding the connector tube
and remove it.
Illustration
Using the coupling tool (35),

remove the tube (10) and separate the cover (4) from the
stop ring (8).
10
Fit the trolley stop (34) and fix

in place using the bolts (40)
recovered from the transport
cover, hand tightening them.
35
34
x 2
40
H M16- 55
Prepare the fitting tool (35)

by screwing the coupling pin
(24) onto its end, hand tightening.
35
24
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
10/18
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
centring pins
Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly
tighten the nuts (41).
Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31).
31
30
41
42
42
41
Removing the
column cover
The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover:
Step
1
Action
Remove the fittings (43) and
open the cover (11).
Illustration
11
x 8
43
H M16- 55
2
Turn the cover (11) through

90 to remove it.
11

09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
11/18
GRID
Installation

Fitting the seal
The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal:
Step
1
Action
Clean the contact surfaces
A and B with ISOPROPANOL.
Only coat surface B with
MOLYKOTE M111 lubricant.
Illustration
B
2
Fit a new seal (20) and place

it on surface A, referring to
Preparing and fitting
static seals.
See
module
General
assembly procedures.
20
3
Temporarily fit a rigid cable

(36) to counter the effects of
the seal (20) coming apart
during the coupling process
20
36
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
12/18
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
coupling pin
The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin:
Step
1
Action
Slowly lower the column (1),
inserting the centring pins
(30) & (31) into the holes in
the flange.
Make sure both pins are correctly aligned.
Illustration
31
2
Slower lower the column to 30

align the pin with the holes in
the cylinder (8) and the rod 8
(12).
12
Insert the fitting tool (35) with

the coupling pin (24) on its
end.
35
24
4
Slightly loosen the two

screws holding the trolley
stop (34) in place and
remove it.
34
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
13/18
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
coupling pin
Step
5
Action
Fit the coupling pin (24) by
manually pulling on the fitting tool (34) until it stops on
the cylinder (8).
Illustration
24
35
8
6
Fit the circlips (25), sliding

them along the fitting tool
(35) using circlips pliers (37).
See the second method (7).
25
35
7
Remove the fitting tool (35)

from the coupling pin,
loosening it by hand.
Second method:
Fit circlips (25) using circlip
pliers (37).
37
25
37
35
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
14/18
GRID
Installation

Connection
chambers/column
Step
1
Action
Remove the rigid cable (36).
Illustration
Remove the trolley stop fixing screws (40).

36
2
40
Lower the seal (20) onto the

chamber casing.
Lower the screws (42) on
the centring pins.
42
20
3
Continue to slowly lower the

column, removing the first
two sections of centring pin
(30 & 31) when they are no
longer of any use as a guide,
in the following order:
- First section (C)
- Screw (42)
- Second section (B)
NOTE: The aim of this
operation is to prevent
the centring pins coming into contact with the
porcelain fins on the
column.
42
(C)
30
31
(42)
(B)
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
15/18
GRID
Installation

Connection
chambers/column
The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column:
Step
4
Action
Slowly lower the column onto
the breaking chamber casing
(2).
Position the lugs (51) for the
corona shield (50) on the rim
of the column then attach
using bolts (21), washers (22)
and special nuts (23) - See
Locking Fixings.
See
module
General
Lock the nuts (23) at the
appropriate torque, immobilising the bolt heads (21).
Tighten all fixings (52) to their

appropriate torque level.
End of coupling operation stop the timer and note the

time taken.
Remove the last section (A)

and the nut (41) from the centring pins.
Fix the last bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23)
referring to Locking fixings.
See
module
General
Illustration
x6
21
51
x 4
22
23
H M10- 30
3,2 daN.m
H M16- 65 (75)
13,5 daN.m
52
50
21
22
(A)
22
23
x 2
H M16-65/75
13,5 daN.m
41
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
16/18
GRID
Installation

Vacuum extraction
and filling with gas
09- 2011
Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with:

S The air extraction operation
S The gas filling operation
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
17/18
GRID
Installation
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7137/EN01
18/18
GRID
Installation
Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker

Presentation
Introduction
The column--chambers coupling is now finished -- the pole is yet maintained

by the lifting equipment. In order to continue the pole installation, it is
necessary now to lay it on the ground.
In this module

Topic
Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker
Vacuum operation
Protection of the interrupting chambers
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
L31--721EN/03
1/4
GRID
Installation

Process
The table below gives the steps of tipping down the pole of the
circuit--breaker :
Step
1
Action
Using the lifting device, slowly tip down the pole around the axis
of the interrupting chambers until the ground.
Pay attention to do not damage the stress--shields ring (11).
2
3
4
Lay the supports of the frame on two wood boards (12).

Remove the flexible lifting straps (15).
Remove the ring bolts (13) and the thick washers (14).
14
x4
11
13
15
12
01--2011
L31--721EN/03
2/4
GRID
Installation

Vacuum operation
Principle
The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of

chambers/column coupling.
Process
See module :
-- Connection the vacuum pump.
-- Vacuum operation.
01--2011
L31--721EN/03
3/4
GRID
Installation

Protection of the interrupting chambers
Introduction
It is important to protect the insulators of the interrupting chambers during the

next operations (installing the terminals, installing the capacitors ...)
Process
To protect the interrupting chambers, use packaging protection , retained

from the opening of the column case.
01--2011
L31--721EN/03
4/4
GRID
Installation
Installing terminals
with preparation of contact surfaces
Presentation
Diagram
In this module

Topic
Components, products and accessories
Preparing the contact surfaces
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
L31--733EN/03
1/4
GRID
Installation
Necessary
components
List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per
pole) :
Mark
Necessary products
and accessories
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Terminal
(3)
Screws
H M12--45
List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the installing :
ALSTOM Grid
reference
01--2011
Diagram
Designation
--01861262
--01835106
Vaseline 204--9
--01835118
Contactal grease
--01831320
Abrasive paper A400
--02212337
Scotch Brite A--VF
--02212334
Rag
--02211842
Round brush No.4
--02211831
Brush No.16
L31--733EN/03
2/4
GRID
Installation
Preparing the
contact grease
The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.

CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease
Preparing the
contact surfaces
The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
Step
Action
Diagram
Remove the temporary screws

from the terminal pads X1 and
X2.
X2
X1
01--2011
Dry rub with fine emery cloth.
Eliminate the dust produced.
Coat
with
GREASE.
Wipe with a clean rag, leaving

just a thin layer of grease.
Rub over the grease with waterproof abrasive paper A400.
CONTACT
L31--733EN/03
3/4
GRID
Installation
Process
Assemble immediately the terminals (1) on the interrupting chambers (2) after
preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); use
CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.
2
2
2
x 4
3
Comment
01--2011
H M12--45
5 daN.m
D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :

R 2
D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the
same way.
L31--733EN/03
4/4
GRID
Installation
Installing the capacitors
Presentation
Diagram
Necessary tools
List of the tools necessary :

Mark
Diagram
(12)
In this module
Designation
Number
Lifting strap
(3 m)

Topic
Page
2
3
4
Components and products

Preparing the capacitors
02--2012
L31--748EN/01
1/4
GRID
Installation

Necessary
components
pole) :
Mark
Necessary products
02--2012
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Capacitor
(3)
Support
(4)
Support
(depending on the apparatus)
(5)
Screws
H M12-30
(8)
Screws
H M12-45
(9)
Screws
H M12-25
(1)
Spacer
or
S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.
L31--748EN/01
2/4
GRID
Installation

Installing
the supports
S Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).
x 2
5
x 2
5
02--2012
4
4
H M12--30
5 daN.m
H M12--30
5 daN.m
L31--748EN/01
3/4
GRID
Installation

Process
Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) using the
screws (8) and (9).
NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor
support (4) side.
x 2
x 2
H M12--25
5 daN.m
H M12--25
5 daN.m
x 2
10
10
H M12--45
5 daN.m
02--2012
L31--748EN/01
4/4
GRID
Installation
Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers
Presentation
Diagram
In this module

Topic
Page
2
3
Preparing the stress--shields

Installing the stress--shields
02--2012
L31--7509EN/01
1/4
GRID
Installation

Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
components
pole) :
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Stress--shields ring
(2)
Bracket
(3)
Screws
H M10-30
Necessary product
MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.
Assembling
Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not
tighten.
2
3
x 4
H M10--30
02--2012
L31--7509EN/01
2/4
GRID
Installation
Installing stress-- shields

Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
components
pole) :
Mark
Diagram
(5)
Designation
Number
Screws
H M12-30
Necessary product
LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)
Process
Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)
using the screws (5).
NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with LOCTITE 262.
4
1
x 4
5
02--2012
H M12--30
5 daN.m
L31--7509EN/01
3/4
GRID
Installation
02--2012
L31--7509EN/01
4/4
GRID
Installation
Lifting and positionning the pole
Presentation
Necessary tools
List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the
pole :
Mark
In this module
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
LIFTING STRAP
(3 m -- 1000 kg)
(2)
LIFTING STRAP
(6 m-- 1000 kg)

Topic
Page
2
3
4
Positioning the lifting straps

Lifting the pole
Positioning the pole
Warning
11--2011
Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact

ALSTOM.
Any faults or cracks in the column may render the procedure
dangerous.
L31--7606EN/03
1/4
GRID
Installation
Positioning the lifting straps

Process
The table below gives the steps of positioning the lifting straps :
Step
1
Action
D For poles of circuit--breakers fitted with a column made up with
three insulators, four 6 m lifting straps are sufficient.
D For columns made up with four insulators, prepare four wholes :
one 3 m lifting strap (1) knotted with one 6 m lifting strap (2).
Pass the lifting straps like the picture below.
-- The lifting straps a pass over the housing (7).
-- The lifting straps b pass under the housing (7).
Cross the lifting straps a and b and place them onto the frame
using the four lifting shackles (8).
b
a
8
a
b
1
2
11--2011
L31--7606EN/03
2/4
GRID
Installation
Lifting the pole

Process
By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the
base of the frame.
Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure
guidance of the pole at the time of lifting.
Lift the pole with precaution.
10
11--2011
L31--7606EN/03
3/4
GRID
Installation

Process
The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step
1
Action
Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground
attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the
orientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.
If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that

the upper plate is level.
Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using
nut.
Remove the lifting straps.
Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.
3
4
5
18 daN.m
Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the
module entitled Tightening Torques and in accordance with the
diameters of the anchoring points.
12
11--2011
L31--7606EN/03
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Necessary product
Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)
Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
tools
List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the installing :
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Lifting strap
(6)
Lever
Lifting equipment
Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).
Process
The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the
pole--support :
Step
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Topic
Preparing the operating device
Preparing the pole operating shaft
Coupling the operating device
Fastening the operating device
Page
2
3
6
8
10
Removing the blocking tool

Low voltage electrical wiring
Permanent heating system
06--2011
prohibited.
11
12
L31--7902EN/01
1/12
GRID
Installation

Unpacking
Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole
reference numbers are the right ones.
Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :
Circuit--breaker
Open
Necessary
components
List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the operation :

Mark
Installing the
necessary
components
Closing spring
Released
Diagram
Designation
Number
(11)
Seal
(22)
Spacer
-- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device.
-- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13).
-- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft
(13).
13
11
x4
22
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
2/12
GRID
Installation

Introduction
For transport the pole is fitted with a securing tool (4) and a safety plate (5),
temporarily attached to the end of the handle (12)
To fit the operating lever, you must:
a -- Remove the securing tool (4).
b -- Manually open the pole.
c --Refit the securing tool (4) (open position).
d -- Remove the safety plate (5).
5
7
12
Grease
Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
3/12
GRID
Installation
Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued

Manual opening
operation
The table below gives the steps of manual opening operation :

Step
1
Action
Remove the securing tool
(4) then screw the operating
lever (6) onto the flange on
the front of the handle
sleeve (12).
Diagram
4
12
6
2
With the help of the lever (6),

effect a 60 rotation of the
sleeve (12).
12
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
4/12
GRID
Installation

Manual opening
operation, continued

Step
3
Action
Put back the blocking tool
(4) on the flange of the
sleeve (12).
NOTE : This tool ensure
the angular positioning of
pole
operating
shaft
during the coupling with
the operating mechanism.
Diagram
M10
6
4
Remove the lever (6).
12
5
Remove the safety plate (5)

and the screws from the
flange on the front of the
handle sleeve (12).
12
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
5/12
GRID
Installation

Necessary
components

Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(10)
Washer
M20
(22)
Spacer
(26)
Spacer
(23)
Eccentric spacer
(14)
Nut
H M20
(24)
Wedge (thickness 1 mm)
(25)
Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm)
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
6/12
GRID
Installation
Coupling the operating device, continued

Coupling
The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling :
Step
1
2
3
Action
Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram.
NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device
before slinging.
Lift the operating device and make this level.
Approximate weight 300 kg.
Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that
the cables touch the stress--shields ring).
The final approach must be done with extreme caution.
4
5
Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12)
of the pole operating shaft.
As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) A emerge from the hole
of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26),
washer (10) and the nut (14).
NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14).
26
14
9
10
8
12
1
17
8
A
13
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
7/12
GRID
Installation

Installing
the fastening nuts
The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening
nuts :
Step
1
3
4
Action
Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower
fastening screw B.
Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on
the upper fastening screws C and D.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14).
Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower
edge of the pole--support oblong holes.
Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the fastening screws (9).
23
5 daN.m
10
14
23
x 2
C
9
D
B
14
10
x1
22

06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
8/12
GRID
Installation
Fastening the operating device, continued

Wedging
and tightening
The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws
depending to the X play :
X
22
Important
20
If the X play is ...
X <1 mm
X 1 mm
Lifting strap
24
25
35 daN.m
Action
Tighten to the indicated tightening
torque.
D Wedge between the spacer (22)
and the operating device (20) with the
provided wedges (24)--(25).
D Tighten the screw to the
indicated tightening torque.
Remove the lifting strap.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
9/12
GRID
Installation

Process
REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
10/12
GRID
Installation

Process
Connect up the operating devices wires refer to the wiring diagram of the circuit--breaker.
Connect up the operating devices wires.
NOTE : Use the holes provided on the supports of the frame to fix
the cables.
Connecting up the
contact densimeter
cable
Connect the wires from the electrical contact SF6 densimeter (18) cable (19)
to the operating mechanism terminal block, in accordance with the relative
diagram.
18
19
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
11/12
GRID
Installation

Process
Switch on the permanent heating system of the operating device (in both summer and winter) to avoid condensation, and the corrosion which might result
from this.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE OPERATING MECHANISM MOTOR WITH CURRENT TO AVOID THE CLOSING SPRING BEING RELOADED.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
12/12
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Necessary
ALSTOM Grid tools

Mark
(1)
(2)
In this module
Diagram
Designation
VACUUM PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
110/220 V 50 Hz (4.5 m3/h)
or
115/230 V 60 Hz (4.5 m3/h)
UNIVERSAL CONNECTION
1/2 GAZ ET 1/2 NPT

Topic
Installing the universal connection
Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump
Connection the ALSTOM Grid supply vacuum pump
01--2011
Number
Page
2
3
4
L31--853EN/03
1/4
GRID
Installation
Installing the universal connection

Process
The table below gives the steps of installing the universal connection :
Step
1
Action
Remove the plug (3).
Diagram
3
2
Install
the
universal
connection (2)) (hand
tightening of nut is
sufficient).
01--2011
L31--853EN/03
2/4
GRID
Installation
Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump

Operation on the
vacuum pump
Close the tap of the vacuum pump.
Universal connection
components
List of the universal connection components :

Mark
Connection
Diagram
Designation
Number
(5)
DILO union
(6)
1/2 GAS union
(7)
1/2 NPT union

inside
NOTE : Minimum
diameter of the tube to use
16.25mm.
(8)
Collar
The table below gives the connection procedure of the vacuum depending of
the used tube union :
2
If the tube is equipped

with an union ...
DILO
DILO
1/2 GAS
1/2 NPT
Action
Remove the universal connection (2) and
connect directly the tube.
Remove the parts (6) -- (7) of the universal
connection (2) and connect the tube onto
the part (5).
Remove the part (7) of the universal
connection (2) and connect the tube onto
the part (6).
No union
Connect the tube directly onto the part (7)
(to avoid, not very reliable) of the universal connection (2) using collar
(8).
01--2011
L31--853EN/03
3/4
GRID
Installation
Connection the ALSTOM Grid supply vacuum pump

Vacuum pump
equipment
The table below describes the accessory (9) main components of the
vacuum pump (1) :
SUCKING UP
PNEUROP DN25
11
14
12
SUCKING BACK
DN25
9
CLOSED
10
13
Process
Mark
Component
(10)
Tap
(11)
(12)
(13)
Pressure gauge
Distribution block
Close tap
The table below gives the steps of the vacuum pump connection :
Step
1
2
3
4
01--2011
Information
Opening -- Closing of the vacuum
pump.
Reading the pressure.
Connection the vacuum pump.
Fastening the accessory (9).
Action
Install the accessory (9) on the
SUCKING UP exit of the vacuum
pump (1).
Close the tap (10).
Connect one end of the tube (14)
to the distribution block (12).
Connect the other end of the tube
(14) to the SF6 checking block.
Comment
Use the close tap (13).
The tube (14) is not provided

by ALSTOM Grid.
Refer to Connection the
tube of the customer supply
vacuum pump
L31--853EN/03
4/4
GRID
Installation
Installing and commissioning

the synchronous device RPH2
Presentation
Introduction
The synchronous device RPH2 is delivered with the C.B. and is to be installed
in the relay room. Delivering the RPH2 with a C.B. includes :
D The RPH2 itself,
D The programming and the testing of the RPH2 device in association with
the C.B., in accordance with the programming document and the checking
document delivered with the C.B.,
D If necessary, a temperature sensor is supplied (in accordance with the
programming document).
The RPH2 installation in the relay room to be made by people in charge of
installing the protection and control equipment in the substation.
The RPH2 installation instructions to people in charge of installing the
protection and control equipment in the substation are detailed below.
In this module

Topic
Installing the RPH2
Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B.
Programming document and checking document delivered
with the C.B.
Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B.
Replacing a RPH2 device
03--2011
Page
2
3
4
5
6
L31--871EN/02
1/6
GRID
Installation

Installing the RPH2
Installing the RPH2
device in the relay
room
The RPH2 device must be installed in the relay room. Cables must be wired :
D between the circuit breaker and the RPH2 device,
D between the High Voltage Transformer (and Current Transformer if
applicable) and the RPH2 device.
Installing the ambient In some application, a temperature sensor to measure the ambient
temperature sensor
temperature is needed to be connected to the RPH2 device, and to correct
(option)
the variation of the C.B. operating times.
When this temperature sensor is needed, it is delivered with the RPH2 device.
This temperature sensor must be fitted at site, near the relay room, to
measure the site ambient temperature.
The temperature sensor must be connected to the RPH2 device using a cable
(twisted pair).
Correspondence
between C.B. poles
and the network
phases and the phase
measuring the
reference voltage
The reference voltage is to be measured upstream the C.B. to synchronize.

The synchronous device RPH2 delivers operating impulses to each circuit
breaker pole, taking into consideration the voltage phase angle of the
network.
Consequently, to obtain the correct synchronization of the circuit breaker
operation, it is necessary to respect the order of the C.B. pole 1, 2 and 3 in
accordance with the direct order of the network phases.
In addition the correct operation of the synchronous device RPH2 needs that
the reference voltage is measured respecting the previous phase in the C.B.
low voltage diagram.
See the module Correspondence between C.B. poles and the network
phases and the phase measuring the reference voltage.
Correspondence
between the RPH2,
the C.B., and the
previous application
Each synchronous device RPH2 is programmed in association with a

particular C.B., and for a previous application.
When the correspondence RPH2 / C.B. must be changed, or when installing
a spare part RPH2, a new programming of the RPH2 device is necessary in
accordance with the programming document delivered with the C.B.
In addition, when the application (type of operation, type of charge) is
changed and is different of the programming document delivered with the
C.B., contact the after-sale service to change the programming document
and eventually the C.B. low voltage diagram.
03--2011
L31--871EN/02
2/6
GRID
Installation

Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B.
Process
The RPH2 device is programmed in factory and tested with the associated
C.B. during the factory tests.
After installing the RPH2 , people in charge of installing the protection and
control equipment in the substation commission the RPH2 with the
associated C.B. They can check the correct operation of the assembly RPH2
+ C.B. using a time recorder tool (type Hathaway CTB400) and referring with
the programming document and the checking document delivered with the
C.B.
03--2011
L31--871EN/02
3/6
GRID
Installation

Programming document and checking document delivered with the C.B.
Introduction
The RPH2 device is delivered with the C.B., and programmed and check
with its associated C.B.
Programming
document
Programming the RPH2 consists to enter in the RPH2 internal memory all the
parameters in relation with the application and also with the type of the
associated C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual 58.020.034). All these
parameters are noted on the document called Programming document
delivered with the C.B.
Checking document
Once programmed, the RPH2 is factory checked with the associated C.B. to
test the correct operation of this assembly. This checking tests that the
sequence of operating times is in accordance with the previous application.
The sequence of these operating times is written in a document called
Checking document delivered with the C.B.
03--2011
L31--871EN/02
4/6
GRID
Installation

Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B.
Process
Contact the after--sale service in order to check if the C.B. is capable of

synchronous operation.
Also using the RPH2 device needs to modify the C.B. low voltage diagram :
D The operation impulses needs to cross the RPH2 device,
D Depending on option and application, some information delivered by the
C.B. needs to be wired to the RPH2 device.
03--2011
L31--871EN/02
5/6
GRID
Installation

Replacing a RPH2 device
Type of RPH2
The RPH2 device must be the same type of the replaced one.
Programming
The RPH2 device must be programmed in accordance with the programming

document associated with the C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual
58.020.034). All these parameters are noted on the document called
Programming document delivered with the C.B.
Checking
Check tests that the sequence of operating times is in accordance with the
previous application. The sequence of these operating times is written in a
document called Checking document delivered with the C.B.
03--2011
L31--871EN/02
6/6
GRID
Installation
RPH2-- Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the

network phases and reference voltage measurement
phase
Presentation
Introduction
The electrical diagram supplied with the circuit breaker illustrates the
connections between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker poles, making the
assumption that :
-- The reference voltage is measured on phase 1.
-- Circuit breaker pole 1 is installed on phase 1 of the network.
-- Circuit breaker pole 2 is installed on phase 2 of the network (phase lag of
120 relative to phase 1 of the network).
-- Circuit breaker pole 3 is installed on phase 3 of the network (phase lag of
240 relative to phase 1 of the network).
If these conditions cannot be respected, it is necessary to change over
the wiring between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker and the
parameter--setting of the times in the RPH2, as per the table below :
Case to treat
In all cases
If the RPH2 synchronizes

both at opening and at
closing
Action
Changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 1 of the
RPH2
Changeover of the operating times
and offset times of the auxiliary
switches programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 1
Changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 2 of the
RPH2
Changeover of the operating times
and lag times of the auxiliary
switches programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 2
Changeover of the connections of
the auxiliary switches
If the circuit breaker

auxiliary switches are
connected to RPH2
If the RPH2 measures the Changeover of the
main current
measurement circuits
03--2011
current
Page
4
5
L31--872EN/02
1/6
GRID
Installation

phase
In all cases
Changeover of the
impulse circuits
corresponding to
channel 1 of the
RPH2
Change over terminals X8 :3, X8 :4 and X8 :5 in order to have :

D X8 :3 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole corresponding
to the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is measured.
to the phase with the 120 lag relative to the phase on which the reference
voltage is measured.
to the phase with the 240 lag relative to the phase on which the reference
The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 1 :
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
From RPH2 terminal X8 :3 RPH2 terminal X8 :4
To Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the
pole corresponding to pole corresponding to
the reference phase the phase with a 120
lag relative to the
reference phase
Changeover of the
operating times and
offset times of the
auxiliary switches
programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 1
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
RPH2 terminal X8 :5
Impulse circuit of the
pole corresponding to
the phase with a 240
lag relative to the
reference phase
Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offset
times of the channel 1 auxiliary switches :
D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2
for phase L1 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker pole
corresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the reference
corresponding to the phase with the 120 lag relative to the phase on which
the reference voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash and
pre--flash times)
the reference voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash and
pre--flash times)
The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offset
times of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 1 :
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
RPH2 item
Phase L1
Phase L2
Data to be Time
of
pole Time of the phase
input
corresponding to corresponding to the
the
reference phase with 120 lag
phase
relative
to
the
reference phase
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
Phase L3
Time
of
pole
corresponding to the
phase with 240 lag
relative
to
the
reference phase
Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.
03--2011
L31--872EN/02
2/6
GRID
Installation

phase
If the RPH2 synchronizes both at opening and at closing
Type of RPH2
Calls for an RPH2 of type RPH2--2xx
Changeover of the
impulse circuits
corresponding to
channel 2 of the
RPH2

D X8 :8 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole
corresponding to the phase with the 120 lag relative to the phase on
which the reference voltage is measured.
corresponding to the phase with the 240 lag relative to the phase on
which the reference voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuits
corresponding to channel 2 :
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
To Impulse circuit of the Impulse circuit of the
lag relative to the
reference phase
Changeover of the
operating times and
offset times of the
auxiliary switches
programmed in the
RPH2 for channel 2 :
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
RPH2 terminal X8 :10
Impulse circuit of the
lag relative to the
reference phase
Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offset
times of the channel 2 auxiliary switches :
the reference voltage is measured.
The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offset
times of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 2 :
RPH2
item
Data to
be
inputDat
os a
entrar
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Time
of
pole
corresponding to
the
reference
phase
Time of the phase

phase with 120 lag
relative
to
the
reference phase
Time
of
pole
phase with 240 lag
relative
to
the
reference phase
Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.
03--2011
L31--872EN/02
3/6
GRID
Installation

phase
If the circuit breaker auxiliary switches are connected to RPH2
Type of RPH2
Calls for an RPH2 with option S.
Changeover of the
connections of the
auxiliary switches

D X8 :13 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker pole
The table below gives the changeover of the connections of the
auxiliary switches :
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
To Auxiliary switch of the Auxiliary switch of the
lag relative to the
reference phase
03--2011
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
RPH2 terminal X8 :15
Auxiliary switch of the
lag relative to the
reference phase
L31--872EN/02
4/6
GRID
Installation

phase
If the RPH2 measures the main current
Type of RPH2
Calls for an RPH2 with option I.
Changeover of the
current measurement
circuits
Change over the terminals of terminal block X9 in order to have :

D X9 :1 and X9 :2 (or X9 :3) linked to the current measurement circuit
corresponding to the phase with the 120 lag relative to the reference phase.
The table below gives the changeover of the current measurement
circuits :
Reference phase
Phase with 120 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
From
RPH2 terminals
RPH2 terminals
X9 :1 and X9 :2
X9 :4 and X9 :5
(or X9 :3)
(or X9 :6)
To Current
Current
measurement circuit measurement circuit
corresponding to the corresponding to the
reference phase
phase with a 120 lag
relative
to
the
reference phase
03--2011
Phase with 240 lag

in relation to the
reference phase
RPH2 terminals
X9 :7 and X9 :8
(or X9 :9)
Current
measurement circuit
phase with a 240 lag
relative
to
the
reference phase
L31--872EN/02
5/6
GRID
Installation

phase
03--2011
L31--872EN/02
6/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
Presentation
Principle
The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of

chambers/column coupling.
Decision table
The table below gives the vacuum operation procedure depending on the
duration of chambers/column coupling :
If the duration of the
Action
chambers/column coupling is ...
40 min
Simple vacuum operation
Vacuum
operation
with
> 40 min
nitrogen purging (N2)
01--2011
Page
2
3
L31--881EN03
1/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
Simple vacuum operation

Process
The table below gives the steps of the simple vacuum operation :
Step
1
2
Action
Comment/Diagram
Start the vacuum pump to KEEP THE PUMP RUNNING
evacuate the pole to a value FOR AT LEAST 1 HOUR AT
THIS VALUE.
1 mbar (100 Pa).
Close the tap (1) of the vacuum
pump.
Open
Closed
3
4
Stop the vacuum pump.

Disconnect the vacuum pump
tube (2).
Fit the filling tool (4) -- HAND

TIGHT.
4
END OF PROCEDURE
01--2011
L31--881EN03
2/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2)

Preparing the
nitrogen bottle (N2)
The table below gives the steps of preparing the nitrogen bottle (N2) :
Step
1
Action
Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)
from the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8).
Diagram
7
6
8
N2
2
Fit the pressure reducer (10) on

the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8).
N2
3
Briefly open the nitrogen (N2)

bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of
the pressure reducer to eliminate
any air inside the piping (approx.
20 s at low flow--rate).
Close the bottle tap (9) and the

cock (11) of the pressure reducer.
NOTE : Keep the end of the
tube (12) in high position to
keep the nitrogen (N2) which it
contains and to prevent damp
air from entering.
Open
N2
4
10
11
Closed
12
N2
11
Closed
END OF PROCEDURE
01--2011
L31--881EN03
3/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued

Vacuum operation
The table below gives the steps of the vacuum operation with nitrogen purging
(N2) :
Step
1
2
Action
Carry out a simple vacuum
operation.
Remove the valve cap (5) of the
filling tool (4).
Comment/Diagram
1 mbar (100 Pa)
during 1 hour.
5
3
S Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle

tap (9).
S Open and close the cock (11)
of the pressure reducer to
eliminate any air inside the tube
(12) (approx. 3 s at low
flow--rate).
S Close the nitrogen (N2) bottle
tap (9).
12
Open
N2
11
Closed
Connect the tube (12) to the filling

tool (4).
4
12
5
Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap

(9) and adjust gas output by
acting on the cock (11) of the
pressure reducer (reduced flow
rate).
S Close the tap (9) from time to
time to check pressure on the
gauge (13).
S Start filling again until the
required
pressure
about
0.03 MPa is reached.
S Close in this order : the tap (9),
then the cock (11).
Open
13
N2
11
Closed
01--2011
L31--881EN03
4/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued

Vacuum operation,
continued
The table below gives the continuation of the steps of the vacuum operation
with nitrogen purging (N2) :
Step
6
Action
Disconnect the tube (12) from the
filling tool (4).
Comment/Diagram
12
7
Remove the filling tool (4) with

the valve cap.
4
8
Connect the vacuum pump and

open the tap (1) to bring the
volume of pole back to ambient
pressure (filled with nitrogen at
0.03 MPa).
Open
Closed
01--2011
Carry out
a new simple
1 mbar (100 Pa)
vacuum operation.
during 1 hour.
END OF PROCEDURE
L31--881EN03
5/6
GRID
Installation
Vacuum operation
01--2011
L31--881EN03
6/6
GRID
Installation

Presentation
Introduction
SF6 pressure values, for the filling, must obligatorily be read on the pressure
gauge 0--1 MPa (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial
densimeter (MPa -- psi), it is not accurate enough for the filling.
Pressure gauge 0...1 MPa
Pressure units
(reminder)
D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).

1 bar (14.503 psi) = 1,000 hPa
1 bar = 100 kPa
10 bar = 1 MPa
Symbols
IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol
pre
pae
pme
In this module
Designation
Filling rated pressure for the insulation
Alarm pressure for the insulation
Minimal pressure for the insulation

Topic
Example of the filling pressure calculation
Calculation of the filling pressure at site
Values of the SF6 gas pressures in accordance
with the temperature
04--2011
Page
2
3
4
L31--924EN/02
1/4
GRID
Installation

SF6 gas
The table below gives the SF6 gas characteristics :

Absolute pressure at 20C(68F)
Filling absolute pressure for the insulapre
tion
i.e. effective pressure
at 20C(68F) and 101.3 kPa
Filling rated effective pressure
+ 0.01
pre
-- 0
for the insulation
Alarm effective pressure for the + 0.02
pae
-- 0
insulation
Minimal effective pressure for
+ 0.02
pme
-- 0
the insulation
SF6 gas density
pre
pae
pme
Minimum admissible temperature
up to
Example
68,7 kg/m3
57,8 kg/m3
55,5 kg/m3
--20C
Values
0,9 MPa
(130.53 psi)
5C
93,2 kPa
The table below gives the calculation steps of the pure SF6 filling pressure :
Step
1
2
3
4
04--2011
0,9 MPa
(130.53 p.s.i.)
0,76 MPa (pme+0,03 MPa)
(110.23 p.s.i.)
0,73 MPa
(105.88 p.s.i.)
Determination of the circuit--breakers filling pressure with SF6 gas.

Parameters
pre
SF6 gas rated filling effective
pressure for the insulation
Ambient temperature
Local atmospheric pressure
SF6 gas filling
1,00 MPa
(145.04 p.s.i.)
Action
Result
In the chart (page 4) Values of the
SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature,
0,832 MPa
read the pre value on the
tC = 5 row.
Calculate the difference of the at0,0081 MPa
mospheric pressure :
0,1013 -- 0,0932
Calculate the rated effective pres0,8401 MPa
sure pre :
0,832 + 0,0081
Filling is carried out to the calculated pressure, plus 0,01 MPa, Pure SF6 gas filling pressure
0,8501 MPa
that is to say :
0,8401 + 0,01
L31--924EN/02
2/4
GRID
Installation

Calculation of the filling pressure at site
Measurement
Write down the result measurement into the corresponding box :

Measure the atmospheric pressure in MPa. A
Measure the ambient temperature in C. B
Calculation of the
pure SF6 gas filling
pressure
Transfer the values into the corresponding box and write down the result :
With the help of the table (page 5) Values of the SF6 gas
effective pressures in accordance with the temperature,
determine the value pre in accordance with
the ambient temperature (B) " C
pre
,
Value of the reference atmospheric pressure in MPa D 0 , 1 0 1
Transfer the value of the local atmospheric pressure
(A) " A Calculate the difference of the atmospheric pressure
(D -- A) " E
Transfer the value (C) "
C+
,
,
,
Calculate the rated effective pressure

(E + C) " F
,
The filling with SF6 gas is carried out
to the calculated pressure, plus 0.01 MPa, + 0 , 0 1
(F + 0.01) " G
04--2011
L31--924EN/02
3/4
GRID
Installation

Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature
Rated effective pressure 0.9 MPa
04--2011
Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures (MPa) corrected in accordance with
temperature for an atmospheric pressure of 101.3 kPa :
t_C
pre
pae
pme
t_C
pre
pae
pme
--20
0,718
0,610
--19
0,723
0,614
0,587
11
0,859
0,726
0,698
0,590
12
0,864
0,730
--18
0,727
0,701
0,618
0,594
13
0,868
0,734
0,705
--17
--16
0,732
0,621
0,597
14
0,873
0,738
0,709
0,736
0,625
0,601
15
0,877
0,741
0,712
--15
0,741
0,629
0,605
16
0,882
0,745
0,716
--14
0,745
0,633
0,608
17
0,886
0,749
0,719
--13
0,750
0,636
0,612
18
0,891
0,753
0,723
--12
0,754
0,640
0,615
19
0,895
0,756
0,726
--11
0,759
0,644
0,619
20
0,900
0,760
0,730
--10
0,764
0,648
0,623
21
0,905
0,764
0,734
--9
0,768
0,651
0,626
22
0,909
0,767
0,737
--8
0,773
0,655
0,630
23
0,914
0,771
0,741
--7
0,777
0,659
0,633
24
0,918
0,775
0,744
--6
0,782
0,663
0,637
25
0,923
0,779
0,748
--5
0,786
0,666
0,640
26
0,927
0,782
0,751
--4
0,791
0,670
0,644
27
0,932
0,786
0,755
--3
0,795
0,674
0,648
28
0,936
0,790
0,759
--2
0,800
0,678
0,651
29
0,941
0,794
0,762
--1
0,805
0,681
0,655
30
0,945
0,797
0,766
0,809
0,685
0,658
31
0,950
0,801
0,769
0,814
0,689
0,662
32
0,955
0,805
0,773
0,818
0,693
0,666
33
0,959
0,809
0,777
0,823
0,696
0,669
34
0,964
0,812
0,780
0,827
0,700
0,673
35
0,968
0,816
0,784
0,832
0,704
0,676
36
0,973
0,820
0,787
0,836
0,708
0,680
37
0,977
0,824
0,791
0,841
0,711
0,683
38
0,982
0,827
0,794
0,845
0,715
0,687
39
0,986
0,831
0,798
0,850
0,719
0,691
40
0,991
0,835
0,802
10
0,855
0,723
0,694
L31--924EN/02
4/4
GRID
Installation
Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa
Presentation
Principle
The pre--filling of the pole with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa must be done after the
vacuum operation.
NOTE : You are reminded that the gas used to fill the pole must
conform to the requirements laid out in IEC 60376.
Necessary equipment List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the pre--filling
and tools
with SF6 gas :
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(4)
Filling tool
(10)
Pressure reducer
(8)
SF6 gas bottle(s)
* depending on the aparatus.
In this module
This module contains the following topics:

Topic
Page
2
3
Preparing the SF6 gas bottle

Pre--filling with SF6 gas
06--2012
L31--951EN/05
1/4
GRID
Installation
Preparing the SF6 gas bottle

Process
The table below gives the steps of preparing the SF6 gas bottle :
Step
1
Action
Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)
from the SF6 gas bottle (8).
Diagram
7
6
8
SF6
2
Fit the pressure reducer (10) on

the SF6 gas bottle (8).
SF6
3
Briefly open the SF6 gas bottle tap

(9) and the cock (11) of the
pressure reducer to eliminate any
air inside the piping (approx. 20 s
at low flow--rate).
Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)

and the cock (11) of the pressure
reducer.
NOTE : Keep the end of the
tube (12) in high position to
keep the SF6 gas which it
contains and to prevent damp
air from entering.
Open
SF6
4
10
11
Closed
12
SF6
11
Closed
END OF PROCEDURE
06--2012
L31--951EN/05
2/4
GRID
Installation
Pre--filling with SF6 gas

Process
The table below gives the steps of the pre--filling with SF6 gas operation :
Step
1
Action
Remove the valve cap (5) of the
filling tool (4).
Comment/Diagram
5
2
D Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9).

D Open and close the cock (11) of
the pressure reducer to eliminate
any air inside the tube (12)
(approx. 3 s at low flow--rate).
D Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9).
Open
SF6
3
12
Closed
11
Connect the tube (12) to the filling

tool (4).
12
4
06--2012
Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)

and adjust gas output by acting on
the cock (11) of the pressure
reducer (reduced flow rate).
D Close the tap (9) from time to
gauge (13).
D Start filling again until the
required pressure about 0.05 MPa
SF6
is reached.
D Close in this order : the tap (9),
then the cock (11).
END OF PROCEDURE
Open
13
11
Closed
L31--951EN/05
3/4
GRID
Installation

06--2012
L31--951EN/05
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Warning
DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING

TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE GAS FILLING
OPERATION SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A
MINIMUM PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).
Necessary equipment List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the filling with
and tools
SF6 gas :
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
Filling tool
Pressure reducer
SF6 gas bottle(s)
14
Gauge
0...1 MPa
* depending on the apparatus.
In this module

Topic
Confirm the pressure
Checking pressure
Checking gas--tightness
Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit--breaker
01--2012
Page
2
3
4
6
7
L32--007EN/05
1/8
GRID
Installation

Filling pressure
calculation
Calculate the SF6 gas filling pressure in accordance with the temperature and
the local atmospheric pressure.
Filling is carried out to calculated pressure plus 0.01 MPa.
See the module SF6 gas monitoring (Calculation of the filling pressure at
site).
Ambient
temperature
0C
Process
The table below gives the steps of the filling with SF6 gas operation :
7
11
Open
SF6
Step
1
2
3
01--2012
Closed
Action
Comment
Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (7) Close the tap (7) from time to
and adjust gas output by acting on time to check pressure on the
the cock (9) of the pressure gauge (11).
Start filling again until the

required pressure is reached.
Close in this order : the tap (7),
then the cock (9).
L32--007EN/05
2/8
GRID
Installation
Confirm the pressure

Process
The table below gives the confirmation operation steps of the filling pressure
with SF6 gas :
Step
1
Action
Disconnect the tube (10) -- of the
pressure reducer -- from the filling
tool (2).
the
NOTE : Keep
unconnected end of the tube
(10) higher than the other end,
to stop the SF6 gas which it
contains from escaping and to
prevent moisture entering.
Comment/Diagram
2
10
S Connect the tube (15) -- of the

gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the
filling tool (2).
S When the required pressure is
confirmed, remove the gauge
(14) and and store it away from
humidity.
15
14
Remove the filling tool (2) and

refit the plug (17) (4 daN.m)
17
01--2012
L32--007EN/05
3/8
GRID
Installation
Checking pressure
Principle
Having allowed the temperature to remain steady for at least 12 hours after
filling, it is necessary to check and definitively adjust the pressure to its
corrected value -- defined according to both ambient temperature and
atmospheric pressure.
Preparation
The table below gives the preparation steps before checking pressure :
Step
1
Action
S Remove the plug (17) and
install the filling tool (2).
S Unscrew the valve--cap (3).
Diagram
17
S Connect the tube (15) -- of the

gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the
filling tool (2).
2
15
14
01--2012
L32--007EN/05
4/8
GRID
Installation
Checking pressure, continued

Decision table
The table below gives the process depending the pressure measured :
14
16
If the pressure measured is ...
correct
too high
too low
End of control
Action
End of control
Adjust the pressure by means of valve
(16) on the gauge (14) to reach the
required corrected pressure.
Top--up with SF6 gas
If the pressure
Action
adjustment
is ...
0.05 MPa
End of control
> 0.05 MPa
Proceed to a
new inspection
after
a
stabilization
period
of
2--3 hours.
The table below gives the end steps of the checking pressure :
Step
1
Disconnect
0--1 MPa.
Action
the gauge
Diagram
(14)
14
S Remove the filling tool (2)

and re--install the plug (17),
applying a tightening torque of
4 daN.m; leak--tightness is only
guaranteed if this condition is
respected.
S Screw the valve--cap (3) on
the filling tool (2).
17
2
3
01--2012
L32--007EN/05
5/8
GRID
Installation
Checking gas-- tightness

Necessary
ALSTOM Grid tools
List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the tightness inspection :
Mark
12
Process
Diagram
Designation
Number
Leak detector (optional)
Make sure that the plug (17) is perfectly leak--tight using the leak detector
(12).
12
17
01--2012
L32--007EN/05
6/8
GRID
Installation
Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit-- breaker

Principle
01--2012
This measurement is not required, the equipment being provided with

molecular sieves in sufficient quantity to give a dew point of 0C (32F) for
an ambient temperature of 20C (68F), this applies for a unit filled to its
nominal pressure for 2 or 3 months.
L32--007EN/05
7/8
GRID
Installation

01--2012
L32--007EN/05
8/8
GRID
Commissioning
Pre--commissioning inspections
Presentation
Introduction
After installation of the bay, completion of all earth circuit and electrical
connections, it is necessary to perform certain pre--commissioning
inspections.
These inspections should be performed with the apparatus ready to be
commissioned (energized), in other words
S LV electrical circuits conforming, in voltage and type, with the low--voltage
diagrams and rating plate of the apparatus.
S SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes at rated SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure.
NOTE : Rated pressure, pressure of equipment after SF6 or SF6+CF4
gas filling.
S Flexible connections linking circuit--breaker to busbar installed.
Caution
DURING OPERATIONS REQUIRED AS PART OF INSPECTION

PROGRAMME PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING, ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL
WORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.
In this module
This module contains the following checking inspections :

Inspections
Pole/operating device coupling sleeve
Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers
SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas
Operating device
Finish and test operations
Important reminder
Page
2
3
4
5
6
May we remind you that the Test Report prior to Commissioning

RES * * * M *
Enclosed with this notice absolutely must be completed.
It must be filled in, dated, signed and sent back
within two weeks following the tests to
ALSTOM Grid
Service Contrats
130 rue Lom BLUM
69611 Villeurbanne
FRANCE
Failing a return of the report within the allowed deadline,
the warranty for the switchgear cannot be taken into
account and the customers liability may be pursued.
* There may be several RES
01--2012
L34--011EN/06
1/6
GRID
Commissioning
Pole/operating device coupling sleeve

Checking
01--2012
Check that the blocking tool is not on the flange of the sleeve. Otherwise
remove it imperatively.
L34--011EN/06
2/6
GRID
Commissioning
Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers

Inspection
Check that the interruption chambers are disposed correctly, the bosses (B1)
and (B2) must be situated on the same side as the operating mechanism (3).
Rule
When facing bosses (B1) and (B2) :

-- chamber 1 is on the left,
-- chamber 2 is on the right.
Diagram
B1
B2
01--2012
L34--011EN/06
3/6
GRID
Commissioning
SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas

Reminder
SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes are at rated pressure following the SF6 or

SF6+CF4 gas filling operation.
Parameters
Take note of parameters below :

S site altitude, in meters,
S atmospheric pressure of site in kPa,
S site temperature in C.
Checking SF6 or
SF6+CF4 gas
SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure values must obligatorily be read on the pressure

inspection gauge (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial
densimeter on the filling control block (where applicable) ; it is not accurate
enough for this inspection.
See the module Calculation of the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressure
to using the pressure gauge (tool).
The table below gives the steps of checking :
Step
1
Action
Measure SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas
pressure by means of the
pressure
inspection
gauge
(tooling)
Correct pressure found.
Comment
Follow the instructions given in
module Filling with SF6 or
SF6+CF4 gas.
Follow the instructions given in
module Calculation of the SF6
or SF6+CF4 gas filling
pressure to using the pressure
gauge (tool).
SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas

humidity level
The SF6 or SF6+CF4 humidity level need not be known as the equipment is
fitted with molecular sieves in sufficient numbers to give a dew point lower
than, or equal to, 0C at an ambient temperature of 20C, for an apparatus
filled to its rated pressure for 2 or 3 months.
Checking tightness
of assemblages
under SF6 or SF6+CF4
pressure
Each on site assemblage of parts subjected to SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas requires

seals. The quality of these assemblages must be checked.
This inspection should be undertaken once all the filling and pressure control
operations are finished.
Execute this checking according to instructions given in module SF6 or
SF6+CF4 gas monitoring.
01--2012
L34--011EN/06
4/6
GRID
Commissioning
Operating device
Measurements
Note the supply voltage of motors on the operating mechanism terminals.
Inspection
Check that the following items are working correctly :

-- heating,
-- lighting (where applicable),
-- connections on terminals (no excessive tightening).
01--2012
L34--011EN/06
5/6
GRID
Commissioning
Finish and test operations

Finish
Check the general appearance of the apparatus and touch up paint if

necessary before commissioning.
Test operations
S The connection of auxiliary circuits is sufficiently advanced to allow remote

controls to be used.
S Perform 5 CLOSING -- OPENING cycles electrically, by remote control.
Caution
DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING

TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE TEST OPERATIONS
SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A MINIMUM
PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).
01--2012
L34--011EN/06
6/6
GRID
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
RAPPORT DESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE

COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad
RELACIN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO
Formulaire RES 310 M
Page / Pgina : 1/12
DISJONCTEUR HEXAFLUORURE DE SOUFRE TYPE

SULFUR HEXAFLUORIDE CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
INTERRUPTOR DE HEXAFLUORURO DE AZUFRE TIPO
avec
commande(s) mcanique(s)
with
__
mechanical control mechanism(s)
con
organo(s) de maniobra mecnico
_______________
type
type
tipo
CLIENT / CUSTOMER / CLIENTE
____________________
Poste/Substation/Subestacin
_________________________
Rfrence client /Customers reference/ Referencia del cliente

Commande ALSTOM N
ALSTOM order N
_______________
N de pedido ALSTOM
Norme
Standard
Norma
__________
____________________
Repre
Item
Ref
__________
Spcification du client
Customers specification _______________
Especificacin del cliente
__________
CARACTRISTIQUES/CHARACTERISTICS/CARACTERISTICAS
Tension/Voltage/ Tensin
_____ kV
Frquence / Frequency / Frecuencia ____ Hz
Courant en service continu /Normal current/ Corriente en servicio continuo
______
Pouvoir de coupure en court-circuit/Short-circuit breaking current/

Poder de corte en corto circuito
______
kA
Pression absolue du gaz SF6 20C :

Pression relative du gaz SF6
Absolute SF6 gas pressure at 20C : _____ Mpa Relative SF6 gas pressure at 20C and 1013 hPa :___ Mpa
Presin absoluta del gas SF6 20C
Presin relativa del gas SF6
Tension dalimentation des circuits auxiliaires/Supply voltage of auxiliary circuits/
Tensin de alimentacin de los circuitos auxiliares
Bobines
Coils
Bobinas
Moteur
Motor
____
Motor
____ V(____)
V(____)
Chauffage
Heater
____
Calefacin
Signalisation
Alarm
____ V(____)
Sealizacin
Circuit de commande
Control circuit
Circuito de mando
Cablage alimentations / Supply voltage wiring
Dfinitif/ definitive
Temporaire/ Temporary
____
V(____)
V(____)
Le matriel a subi les contrles et essais avant mise en service, conformment au fascicule (contrles avant mise en service).
The material was subjected to the inspections and tests prior to commissioning as required in sections (inspections commissioning).
El material fue sometido a las inspecciones y a los ensayos antes de la puesta en servicio como requerido en las secciones (inspecciones antes de la
puesta en servicio).
Date de fin de montage

Erection completion date ___________
Fecha de conclusion de montaje
Date des essais de mise en service
Commissioning date ____________
Fecha de puebras para puesta en servicio
Ralis par
Performed by ____________
Realizado por
Raliss par
Performed by ____________
Realizado por
Pour le client
For the customer_______________
Para el cliente
Pour le client
For the customer_______________
Para el cliente
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

CONTRLE PRLIMINAIRES AVANT INSTALLATION

PRELIMINARY INSPECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION
INSPECCINES PRELIMINARES ANTES DE LA INSTALACIN
Constat sur le site

Verification at site
Verificacin en el sitio
Organe de manuvre
Operating mechanism
tat des emballages
Organo de maniobra
Condition of packings
lment de ple
Condicin de los embalajes
Pole element
Elemento de polo
Sous abri
Under shelter
Al abrigo
Ralisation du stockage
Correcte
Storage
Satisfactory
Almacenamiento
Correcto
Dfectueuse
Unsactisfactory
Defectuoso
Alimentation du chauffage des commandes
Heating system supply of mechanisms
Alimentacin del calamiento de los mandos
Vrification de la prsence de la pression SF6 de
transport
Checking of transport SF6 pressure
Comprobacin de la presin de SF6 de transporte
Ple
Ple A
Polo
Ple
Ple B
Polo
Ple
Ple C
Polo
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Observations Remarks Observaciones
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
Page
2/12
Pgina
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

Page
3/12
Pgina
IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICACIN
Ple
Pole
Polo
Ple A
Ple B
Ple C
Repre / N ttes / N colonnes

Item / N heads / N columns
Referencia / N cabezas / N columnas
1 __________
4 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
7 __________
_______________
10 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
2 __________
_______________
5 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
8 __________
_______________
11 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
3 __________
_______________
6 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
9 __________
_______________
12 __________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Nombre darmoires
Number of cubicles
Numero de armarios
__
10
11
12
Ple A
Fonctionnement unipolaire
One pole operation
____
Funcionamiento unipolar
Ple B
Ple C
Fonctionnement tripolaire
Three-pole operation
____
Funcionamiento tripolar
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad
VRIFICATION APRS MONTAGE

CHECKS AFTER ERECTION
COMPROBACIN DESPUS INSTALACIN
Schma de cblage
Wiring diagram
Esquema de alambrado
Croquis de montage
Assembly drawing
Dibujo de instalacin
_______________
_______________
Conformit croquis montage

Conformity to instalation drawing __________
Conformidad con dibujo de montaje
Conformit schma filerie

Conformity to wiring diagram
__________
Conformidad con esquema de alambrado
Vrification de lassemblage
Vrification of assembly
Comprobacin del montaje
Conformit signalisation optique

Confomity of optical indication
__________
Conformidad de la sealizacin optica
Notice
Instructions manual
Manual de instruccines
__________
_______________
RELEVS DES COMPTEURS DE MANOEUVRES

NOTED DOWN THE COUNTER READINGS
ANOTAR NUMERO DE MANOBRIAS DE LOS CONTADORES
Ple/Pole/Polo
Ple A
Relev des compteurs de manuvres
pendant
remplissage
en
SF6
et
accouplement au ple
Noted down the counter readings during the
filling up of SF6 and coupling of the pole
Anotar numero de maniobras de los contadores
durante el llenado en SF6 y acoplamiento al
polo
Ple/Pole/Polo
Ple B
_______
Ple/Pole/Polo
Ple C
_______
_______
OBSERVATIONS REMARKS OBSERVACIONES
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
Page
4/12
Pgina
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

Page
5/12
Pgina
ESSAIS DE TENUE LA TENSION DES CIRCUITS AUXILIAIRES ET DE COMMANDE

VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TESTS ON AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
ENSAYOS DE TENSIN SOPORTADA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AUXLIARES Y DE MANDO
Appareil de mesure test equipment
N de srie serial number
Calibration date
Observations
Application dune tension dessai de

kV (valeur efficace) pendant
s, entre la filerie et le bti.
Application of a test voltage of
______ kV (rms value)
for
______ s, between wiring and the base.
Aplicacin de una tensin de ensayo de
kV, (valor eficaz) durante
s, entre la cableria y la base.
Les moteurs et les quipements, dj essays conformment leur propre spcification, ont t
dconnects pendant ces essais.
The motors and equipments tested previously in accordance with their own specification were disconnected
during these tests.
Los motores y equipos sometidos anteriormente a ensayos de acuerdo con sus especificaciones propias fueron
desconnectados durante estos ensayos.
MESURAGE DE LA RSISTANCE DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL

MEASUREMENT OF THE RESISTANCE OF THE MAIN CIRCUIT
MEDICIN DE LA RESISTENCIA DEL CIRCUITO PRINCIPAL
Courant continu dessai

Test direct current
100 A
Corriente continua de ensayo
Calibration date
Temprature au moment des essais

Temperature at testing time
______ C
Temperatura al momento de las pruebas
Ple
Ple A
Polo
Valeurs en / Values in / Valores en :
Observations
Ple
Ple B
Polo
Ple
Ple C
Polo
1 _____
4 _____
2 _____
5 _____
3 _____
6 _____
7 _____
10 _____ 8 _____
11 _____
9 _____
12 _____
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

VRIFICATION DE LA PRESSION DU GAZ

GAS PRESSURE CHECK
COMPROBACIN DE LA PRESIN DEL GAS
Page
6/12
Pgina
MPa
Calibration date
Observations
SF6 pur / pure SF6 / SF6 puro

Valeurs en pression absolue
Mlange SF6/CF4 / mix SF6/CF4 / mezcla SF6/CF4 Values in absolute pression
Valores en la presin absoluta
_____ % SF6
_____ % CF4
Altitude
Altitude
Altitud
Pression baromtrique
Barometric pressure
______ hPa
Presin baromtrica
______ m
Pression absolue / Absolute pressure

Pressin absoluta
Mesurage de la pression de remplissage
Filling pressure measurement
Medicin de la presin de llenado
Valeur calcule quivalente 20C en MPa absolue
Equivalent computed values at 20C in MPa absolute
Valores computados equivalentes para 20C en MPa
absolutos
Pression relative / relative pressure

Pressin relativa
At 20C and 1013 hPa
Mesurage de la pression de remplissage
Filling pressure measurement
Medicin de la presin de llenado
Valeur calcule quivalente en MPa
Equivalent computed values in MPa
Valores computados equivalentes en MPa
Temprature
Temperature
Temperatura
______ C
Pole 1
Pole 2
Pole 3
______
______
______
______
______
______
Pole 1
Pole 2
Pole 3
______
______
______
______
______
______
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

CONTRLE DES DENSIMTRES DE SURVEILLANCE DE LA PRESSION

GAS PRESSURE MONITORING DENSIMETERS INSPECTION
COMPROBACIN DE LOS DENSIMETROS DE VIGILANCIA DE LA PRESIN
Pression baromtrique
Barometric pressure ________hPa
Presin baromtrica
Temprature
Temperature
Temperatura
(pression relative en MPa)

(relative pressure in MPa)
(pressin relativa en MPa)
Calibration date
Pole 1
Page
7/12
Pgina
Observations
Pole 2
Pole 3
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Seuil
Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
Umbral
________
Mesurage des pressions des seuils

Thresholds pressures measurement
Medicin
de las presiones des los
umbrales
Valeur calcule quivalente
20C 1013 hPa en MPa
Equivalent computed values
Valores computados equivalentes
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad
ESSAIS DE FONCTIONNEMENT MCANIQUE

MECHANICAL OPERATING TESTS
ENSAYOS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO MECNICO
Tension dalimentation sur le site.

Supply voltage on site
____
Tensin de alimentacin sobre el sitio
Manuvre douverture
Opening operation
Maniobra de apertura
Calibration date
ms
Observations
V(DC)
Ple
Ple A
Polo
4
7
10
Ple
Ple B
Polo
5
8
11
Ple
Ple C
Polo
6
9
12
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
SC
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
way 1 C
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
way 1 SC
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
Way 2 C
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
Manuvre de fermeture
Closing operation
Maniobra de cierre
Manuvre douverture
Opening operation
DURES DE FONCTIONNEMENT
OPERATING TIMES
TIEMPO DE OPERACIN
Page
8/12
Pgina
Way
SC
Cycle de manuvre de fermeture- C

ouverture
Close-open operating cycle : CO
Ciclo de maniobras de cierre-apertura
O
Dure de fermeture-ouverture
Close-open time
Tiempo de cierre-apertura
Squence de manuvre
Operating sequence
:
O-CO
Secuencia de maniobra
Dure douverture-fermeture
Open-close time
Tiempo de apertura-cierre
Dure de fermeture
Close-Open time
Tiempo de cierre-apertura
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

MESURAGE DES CARTS DE SIMULTANIT

COINCIDENCE DEVIATION MEASUREMENT
MEDICIN DE LAS DESVIATIONES DE SIMULTANEIDAD
Entre lments de coupure dun mme ple

Between breaking elements of a same pole
Entre elementos de interrupcin de un mismo polo
Entre ples
Between poles
Entre polos
Page
9/12
Pgina
ms
Ple
Ple A
Polo
Ple
Ple B
Polo
Ple
Ple C
Polo
Fermeture
Closing
Cierre
______
______
______
Ouverture voie 1
Opening way 1
Apertura via 1
______
______
______
Ouverture voie 2
Opening way 2
Apertura via 2
______
______
______
Fermeture
Closing
Cierre
______
Ouverture voie 1
Opening way 1
Apertura via 1
______
Ouverture voie 2
Opening way 2
Apertura via 2
______
MESURAGE DES DURES DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES

MEASUREMENT OF AUXILIARY CONTACT OPERATING DURATIONS
MEDICIN DE DURACIONES DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LOS CONTACTOS AUXILIARES
Manuvre de fermeture
Closing operation
Maniobra de cierre
Manuvre douverture
Opening operation
ms
Type de contact
Contact type
Tipo de contacto
52 b
Ple
Ple A
Polo
______
Ple
Ple B
Polo
______
Ple
Ple C
Polo
______
52a
______
______
______
52b
______
______
______
52a
______
______
______
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

Page
10/12
Pgina
MESURAGE DE LA RSISTANCE DE LA CHAMBRE AUXILIAIRE

MEASUREMENT OF THE AUXILIARY CHAMBER RESISTOR
MEDICIN DE LA RESISTENCIA DE LA CAMARA AUXILIAR
Calibration date
Ple A
Valeur en
Values in
Valores en
DURE DINSERTION DE LA RSISTANCE

RESISTOR INSERTION TIME
TIEMPO DE INSERCIN DE LA RESISTENCIA
Scurit louverture de la rsistance

Safety at resistor opening
Securitad a la apertura de la resistencia
Dure dinsertion de la rsistance

Resistor insertion time
Tiempo de insercin de la resistencia
Observations
Ple B
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
10
11
12
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
10
11
12
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
10
11
12
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
ms
MESURAGE DES DURES DE RARMEMENT DE LORGANE DE COMMANDE

MEASUREMENT OF OPERATING MECHANISM RECLOSING DURATIONS
MEDICIN DE DURACIONES DE REARME DEL ORGANO DE MANIOBRA
Dure de rarmement aprs un C
Reclosing duration after one C
Duracin de rearme despues de una C
Ple C
______
______
______
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad
Page
11/12
Pgina
VRIFICATION DIVERSES
VARIOUS CHECKINGS
COMPROBACINES DIVERSAS
Dispositif danti-pompage
Ouverture de secours
Anti-pumping device
Dispositivo de anti-bombeo
Emergency opening
Apertura de emergencia
Fermeture localemcanique/lectrique
Ouverture locale mcanique/lectrique
Local closing
Cierre local
Local opening
Apertura local
mechanical/electrical
mecnico/electrico
mechanical/electrical
mecnico/electrico
Fermeture distance
Ouverture distance
Remote closing
Cierre distancia
Remote opening
Apertura distancia
Chauffage thermostat
Signalisation dfaut SF6 1er seuil
Thermostated heating
Calefaccin con termostats
SF6 fault indication 1st thereshold

Sealisacin de falta de SF6 1o umbral
Chauffage permanent
Signalisation dfaut SF6 2nd seuil
Permanent heating
Calefaccin permanente
SF6 fault indication 2nd thereshold

Sealisacin de falta de SF6 2o umbral
Serrage des bornes BT
Peinture et protection contre la corrosion.
Tightening of LV terminals
Apriete de las terminales BT
Painting and protection against corrosion

Pintura y proteccin contra la corrosion
Squence de fonctionnement
Contrle de ltanchit SF6 des assemblages
Operating sequence
Secuencia de maniobra
SF6 tightness testing of assemblies

Comprobacin de estanqueidad SF6 de los
montajes
Relev des compteurs de manuvres

Reading of operating counters
Lectura de contadores de maniobra
Ple A
Ple B
Ple C
_____
_____
_____
Dans le cas des appareils en T un minimum de 50 manuvres doit tre ralises sur site.
D'aprs norme CEI 62271-100 pour validation des accouplements raliss sur site.
For the T shaped breakers a minimum of 50 operations has to be done on site.
According to IEC 62271-100 standard to validate coupling made on site.
En el caso de interuptors en T, se debe llevar a cabo un mnimo de 50 maniobras en la obra.
de acuerdo con la norma IEC 62271-110 para validacin de los acoplamientos realizados en la obra.
EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
010
06/03/2012
N dInstruction
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
_______________ / __________
Service Qualit
Quality Department
Servicio de calidad

OBSERVATIONS REMARKS OBSERVACIONES
ALSTOM Grid SAS

Socit par actions simplifie au capital de 74.478.096
Sige social: Immeuble Le Galile 51, esplanade du Gnral de Gaulle 92907 La Dfense Cedex (France)
389 191 800 RCS Nanterre

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M
N dInstruction
010
06/03/2012
Indice
Date de rvision
Page
12/12
Pgina
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne France
CHECKLIST RPH2
WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ON SITE
RES 310 M RPH2 page 1/2
Breaker type :
RPH2 Type :
Country :
Serial number :
Serial number :
Site :
Item :
Date :
SYSTEM DATA
System frequency
16 2/3 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
Control voltage
. Volts
Reference phase
A
B
C
If the reference voltage is different from Phase A, mind to rotate the phases on orders
outputs (channel A and channel B), auxiliaries and current measurements
Rated pressure :
. Bars
Switching program
Shunt Reactor
Capacitor Bank
Transformer
User Program
Password : 0000
POW
Time - Channel 1
Neutral isolated
Time - Channel 1
Neutral grounded
Time - Channel 2
Neutral isolated
Time - Channel 2
Neutral grounded
L1
L2
L3
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
VERIFICATIONS
(or evently with rotation)
Check wiring according to the electrical scheme
Check the earthing of the RPH2 (on lateral flange)
Measurement of operating times (A, B and C)
(For multichambers CB, slowliest chamber on closing and fastest on opening)
Calculation of timeshift between main contact & Csa
Validation of the parameters
(e.g. with TM1600 + MA61 + sinusoide generator)
FINAL PARAMETERS
L1
Operating time CH1
Operating time CH2
Arcing time CH1
Arcing time CH2
Aux timeshift CH1
Aux timeshift CH2
L2
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
L3
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
Test completion date
For the installator, prepared by :
Date de fin des essais
Pour l'installateur, tabli par
For the customer
Checked by ALSTOM Grid
Pour le client
Vrifi par ALSTOM Grid
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne France
Measurements for RPH2 parametrization

RES 310 M RPH2 page 2/2
Phase A
Csa C
(ms)
MC C
(ms)
operation 1
operation 2
operation 3
operation 4
operation 5
Total of the column
Mean value = Total/5
0
0
SC
(m/s)
0
0
Un C
(V)
0
0
MC O
(ms)
0
0
Csa O
(ms)
SO
(m/s)
0
0
Un O
(V)
0
0
0
0
Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C

Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O
Phase B
MC C
(ms)
operation 1
operation 2
operation 3
operation 4
operation 5
Total of the column
SC
(m/s)
Csa C
(ms)
0
0
0
0
Un C
(V)
0
0
Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C

Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O
MC O
(ms)
0
0
Csa O
(ms)
SO
(m/s)
0
0
Un O
(V)
0
0
0
0
Phase C
CP C
(ms)
operation 1
operation 2
operation 3
operation 4
operation 5
Total of the column
SC
(m/s)
Csa C
(ms)
0
0
0
0
Un C
(V)
0
0
CP O
(ms)
0
0
Csa O
(ms)
SO
(m/s)
0
0
Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C 0

Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O 0
Mean value of the 3 closing speeds (m/s)
Mean value of the 3 opening speeds (m/s)
MC = Main Contacts
Csa = Secondary Contacts a
O = Opening
C = Closing
0
0
SC = Speed of Closing
SO = Speed of Opening
Un O
(V)
0
0
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
CA 103 271 3
INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE
Critre d'Acceptation
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
METTEUR - TRANSMITTER :
QUALITE : PM Q1\- QUALITE MONTAGE :
PA Q04\I O A de la Qualit Montage
QUALITY DEPARTEMENT
QUALIT - QUALITY
ENVIRONNEMENT - ENVIRONMENT
SCURIT - SECURITY
N CRITRE DACCEPTATION
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA NUMBER
CA 103 271 3
INDICE : 010
01/19/2012
OBJET - TITLE :
DISJONCTEUR GL315X (D) GL317X (D) COMMANDE MCANIQUE FK3.5 - MONTAGE SITE
CIRCUIT BREAKER GL315X (D) GL31X (D) WITH SPRING MECHANISM FK3.5 SITE ERECTION
DESTINATAIRES - EXEMPLARIES :
Pas de poste OPM en diffusion
Rdacteur(s) :
Drafter visa
MALATIER Thierry
Sign le 01/18/2012
Approbateur(s) :
Approver visa
ALAMEDDINE Alaa
Sign le 01/18/2012
Vrificateur(s) :
Supervisor visa
DOUMMAR Georges
Sign le 01/18/2012
14/10/2003
20/01/2011
1/5
CA 103 271 3
010
N dinstruction
Date dmission
Indice
Date de rvision
Page
Le prsent document, proprit exclusive dALSTOM, ne peut tre reproduit quavec laval du responsable de
service et ne peut tre diffus un tiers quavec laval du responsable de service et du responsable qualit.
HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS - 130, rue Lon Blum 69611- Villeurbanne Cedex - France
Tl : +33 (0)4 72 68 34 34 - Fax : +33 (0)4 72 68 39 22
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
CA 103 271 3
VALIDIT
VALIDITY
DISJONCTEUR
CIRCUIT BREAKER
: GL 315X (D) GL317X (D)
PRESSION SF6
SF6 PRESSURE
: Pre = 0,55 1.0 MPa (absolue)
COMMANDE
MECHANISM
: MCANIQUE FK 3.5
: SPRING MECHANISM
DFINITION DES DURES
TIME DEFINITION
DURE DE FERMETURE : Intervalle de temps

entre l'instant de mise sous tension du circuit de
fermeture et l'instant o les contacts se touchent
dans tous les ples.
CLOSING TIME : Interval of time between

energizing the closing circuit and the instant when
the contacts touch in all poles.
DURE D'OUVERTURE : Intervalle de temps

entre l'instant de mise sous tension du
dclencheur et l'instant de la sparation des
contacts d'arc sur tous les ples (ou des contacts
du simulateur commands par la charge fictive).
OPENING TIME : Interval of time between the

instant of energizing the opening release and the
instant when the arcing contacts have separated in
all poles (or simulator contacts controled by the
dummy load).
DURE D'OUVERTURE-FERMETURE : Intervalle

de temps entre l'instant de sparation des contacts
dans tous les ples, et l'instant o les contacts se
touchent dans le premier ple pendant une
manuvre de refermeture (refermeture : l'appareil
est referm automatiquement aprs un intervalle
de temps prdtermin -195 ms-).
OPEN-CLOSE TIME : Interval of time between the

instant when the arcing contacts have separated in
all poles and the instant when the contacts touch in
the first ple during a reclosing operation (reclosing
: the equipment is automatically reclosed after a
predetermined interval of time -195 ms-).
DURE
DE
FERMETURE-OUVERTURE
:
Intervalle de temps entre l'instant o les contacts
se touchent dans le premier ple pendant une
manuvre de fermeture, et l'instant o les
contacts d'arc sont spars dans tous les ples
pendant la manuvre d'ouverture qui lui fait suite
(le dclencheur d'ouverture est mis sous tension
au moment o les contacts se touchent dans le
premier ple pendant la fermeture).
CLOSE OPEN TIME : Interval of time between the

instant when the contacts touch in the first pole
during a closing operation, and the instant when
the arcing contacts have separated in all poles
during the subsequent opening operation (the
opening release is energizing when the contacts
touch in the first pole during the closing operation).
CART DE SIMULTANIT ENTRE CHAMBRES

D'UN MME PLE : Pour la mme manuvre
diffrence de temps maximale entre les instants o
les contacts des chambres se touchent la
fermeture et diffrence de temps maximale entre
les instants de sparation des contacts des
chambres l'ouverture.
DEVIATION BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE

SAME POLE : For the same operation maximum
deviation between the instants when the chambers
contacts touch during the closing operation and
maximum deviation between the instants when the
chambers contacts are separated during the
opening operation.
2/5
14/10/2003
20/01/2011
CA 103 271 3
010
Page
N dinstruction
Date dmission
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
CA 103 271 3
CART DE SIMULTANIT ENTRE PLES : Pour

la mme manuvre, diffrence de temps maximale
entre les instants o les contacts de ples se touchent
la fermeture et diffrence de temps maximale entre
les instants de sparation des contacts des ples
l'ouverture.
Dans le cas de ple multi-chambres, le ple est
considr ferm quand la dernire chambre est
ferme et il est considr ouvert quand la premire
chambre est ouverte.
DEVIATION BETWEEN POLES : For the same

operation maximum deviation between the instants
when the poles contacts touch during the closing
operation and maximum deviation between the
instants when the pales contacts are separated
during the opening operation.
In the case of multichambers poles, the pole is
considered closed when the last chamber is closed
and it is considered opened when the first chamber
is opened.
DUREE DINSERTION DE LA RESISTANCE : sur

une manuvre de fermeture, intervalle de temps
entre lentre en contact des contacts darc et
lentre en contact des contacts de linsreur
(rsistance court-circuite).
RESISTOR INSERTION TIME : during a closing

operation, interval of time between the instant
when the arcing contacts are touching and the
instant when the inseror contacts are touching
(resistance short-circuited).
Remarque : la dure de fermeture au sens de la

norme CEI et pour les appareils avec rsistance
dinsertion correspond la somme de la dure de
fermeture et de la dure dinsertion telles que
dfinies prcdemment.
Note : the closing time according the IEC standard

for circuit-breakers with switching resistors is equal
to the sum of the closing time and resistor insertion
time as dfined above.
3/5
14/10/2003
20/01/2011
CA 103 271 3
010
Page
N dinstruction
Date dmission
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
CA 103 271 3
DURES DE FONCTIONNEMENT
MECHANICAL OPERATING TIMES
(en ms tension assigne)

( in ms at rated voltage)
DURES DES CHAMBRES

TIMINGS OF CHAMBERS
MANOEUVRE
OPERATION
Minimum
Maximum
Fermeture - Closing
Ouverture O1/O2 - Opening O1/O2
Fermeture par relais TEC Closing with relay TEC
Fermeture par relais Allen Bradley - Closing with relay Allen Bradley
Fermeture par relais FINDER - Closing with relay FINDER
Ouverture O1/O2 par relais TEC
Opening with relay O1/O2 with relay TEC
Ouverture O1/O2 par relais Allen Bradley
Opening O1/O2 with relay Allen Bradley
Ouverture O1/O2 par relais FINDER - Opening O1/O2 with relay FINDER
Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO
Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO
CO
1re Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO
Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO
2me Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO
Insertion de la rsistance la fermeture Resistor insertion on closing
94
21
103
113
101
28
114
27
128
138
127
42
36
50
28
94
43
52
21
94
43
6
40
114
59
85
27
114
59
9
Minimum
Maximum
95
80
31
39
9
20
95
80
31
39
135
110
61
69
25
33
135
110
61
69
DURES DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES

TIMINGS OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS
TYPE DE CONTACT - MANOEUVRE
TYPE CONTACT - OPERATION
Type a / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO
Type b / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO
Type a / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO
Type b / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO
Type a / 1re Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO
Type b / 1re Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO
Type a / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO
Type b / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO
Type a / 2me Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO
Type b / 2me Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO
4/5
14/10/2003
20/01/2011
CA 103 271 3
010
Page
N dinstruction
Date dmission
Indice
Date de rvision
GRID
ALSTOM Grid SAS
130, rue Lon Blum
69611 Villeurbanne
France
CA 103 271 3
CART ENTRE CHAMBRES D'UN MME POLE (en ms tension assigne)

DEVIATIONS BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE SAME POLE (in ms at rated voltage)
MANOEUVRE
OPERATION
Maximum
Fermeture - Closing
Ouverture - Opening
2
2
CART ENTRE POLES (1)

(en ms tension assigne)
DEVIATIONS BETWEEN POLES (1)
(in ms at rated voltage)
(1) Dans le cas dun disjoncteur unipolaire, ne pas tenir compte de lcart entre ples.
(1) In the case of single pole breaker, deviations between poles criteria do not apply.
MANOEUVRE
OPERATION
Maximum
Fermeture - Closing
Ouverture - Opening
5
3
DURES DE REARME
CHARGING TIME
Tension Moteur en V
Motor Voltage in V
toutes
all
(en s tension assigne)

(in s at rated voltage)
Maximum
10
RESISTANCE DE CONTACT DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL (sans prise de courant)

(en sous courant continu de 100 A)
MAIN CIRCUIT RESISTANCE (without HV terminal)
(in with a 100 A direct courrent)
Type de chambre
Type of chamber
105/ 4
105/ 5
105/ 7
105/ 11
105/12
105/13
GL316X 5500A 105/12
Maximum
90
93
95
93
96
93
70
5/5
14/10/2003
20/01/2011
CA 103 271 3
010
Page
N dinstruction
Date dmission
Indice
Date de rvision
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Presentation
Introduction
GL circuit--breakers use pure SF6 gas as an arc quenching medium (or a

SF6+CF4 gas mixture) and require only a reduced amount of maintenance.
In this module

Topic
Maintenance plan
Maintenance operations
Detail of maintenance operations
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
L51--004EN/05
1/6
GRID
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Maintenance plan
Maintenance
frequency
Under normal operating conditions, the maintenance plan may be defined as

follows :
Type of
examination
01--2011
Frequency
Maintenance
visits
Once or twice a year
Inspections
Every five years
Overhaul
Perform when one of the

following
criteria
is
reached :
D operating
life
time
20 years
D number of mechanical
cycles 3,000
D electric wear limit
Comment
It is advisable to perform
at least 2 CO duty cycles
per year, when apparatus
are scarcely used, in order
to
check
that
the
circuit--breaker
and
associated
control
circuits
are
working
properly.
This
necessitates
circuit--breaker shutdown. It
is not necessary, however to
dismantle
interrupting
chambers
and
other
sub--assemblies.
However, it is recommended
to proceed with inspection of
the pole or circuit--breaker
used the most, then to adapt
the
maintenance
programme for the other breakers depending on the
results observed.
L51--004EN/05
2/6
GRID
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Maintenance operations
Guide
The table below is a guide of the operations to be carried out at each

maintenance stage :
MAINTENANCE VISITS (1 or 2 times a year)
INSPECTION (every 5 years)
OVERHAUL (OPERATING TIME : 20 years)
OVERHAUL (MECHANICAL OPERATIONS : 3 000 cycles)
OVERHAUL (ELECTRICAL WEAR : see Electrical wear
limits)
J J J J J Operation counter reading.

Overall inspection : appearance (corrosion, paintwork,
signs of overheating).
Check operation of permanent heating. Check condition
J J J J
of air vents.
If the circuit--breaker is fitted with an SF6 dial densimeter
or a pressure gauge, check SF6 pressure (or SF6+CF4
J J
gas mixture).
It is advisable to perform at least 2 CO duty cycles per
year, when apparatus are scarcely used, in order to
check that circuit--breaker and associated control circuits
are working properly.
Check SF6 densimeter thresholds. Then adjust pressure
J J
to its rated value.
Check tightening of parts not subjected to pressure
J J J
(frame -- deck -- cubicle).
Check tightening of low voltage terminals ( 6 months
J J J
after commissioning).
Check relay operation.
J J J
Change door seal, side panels seal and roof seal.
J
J J J
J
J
J J J J Measure operating times for poles and auxiliary contacts.

Carry out operations at recommended duties and rated
voltage.
J J Change (or recondition) interrupting chambers.
Check that the damper piston for the opening of the
J
control presents no oil leak.
J J J J
01--2011
L51--004EN/05
3/6
GRID
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Detail of maintenance operations

Caution
DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL
WORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.
(Disconnect CB from HV system, remove LV supplies etc.)
General condition
of the apparatus
The apparatus should be subjected to visual inspection. If patches of

corrosion are found begin reconditioning of the affected parts.
The table below gives the process respecting surface finish and protection :
Support
Inspection
Galvanized
steel
Oxidized parts
Light scratches
Painted
galvanized
steel
or
painted
aluminium
alloy
Deep scratches
or flaking
Action
D Thorough brushing of oxidized
parts.
D Degreasing with solvent.
D Application of a coat of zinc
paint.
D Thorough degreasing with
solvent.
D Application of a coat of lacquer
using a brush.
D Scouring of paint surface with
emery paper 400.
D Thorough degreasing with
solvent.
D Application of a coat of primer,
then drying for 24 h.
D Application of a coat of
polyurethane lacquer using a
brush.
Products used :
D RUMCOAT EEVA primer by DERIVERY ref. 333103.
D Polyurethane lacquer 780 by DERIVERY, ref. depending on color of
equipment.
01--2011
L51--004EN/05
4/6
GRID
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Detail of maintenance operations, continued

SF6 pressure gas
For a circuit--breaker equipped with a dial--type SF6 gas densimeter, check

the position of the needle.
Needle position
Colored area
Direction
GREEN
None
YELLOW
Perform a topping--up
operation.
Abnormally low density,

find the origin of the
leak and contact
ALSTOM Grid
After--sales Service.
RED
NOTE : If the intersection is in either the yellow or red zone, without

any particular indication from the electrical contact densimeter, verify
the concordance of different information sources to find the defective
element and then replace it.
Operating device
Air--vents should be clean, free of dust and unobstructed. If necessary clean

using a solvent.
Make sure that the permanent resistors are working properly by checking that
these give off heat and that there are no overheating marks (a zone notorious
for this).
For thermally controlled resistors, check that energizing and de--energizing
takes place correctly at voltage supply terminals by means of a thermostat
(recommended thermostat temperature : +5C).
If necessary, change resistors found to be defective.
For the opening damper, if any leak is observed, please contact
ALSTOM Grid, After--Sales Department, to proceed with any changes
Operation counter
Read indications given by the counter(s) and note these on the inspection
sheet Maintenance visits.
The number of circuit--breaker operations recorded influences future
maintenance operations.
01--2011
L51--004EN/05
5/6
GRID
Maintenance
Maintenance plan
Detail of maintenance operations, continued

Electrical densimeter
thresholds
Check the electrical contact SF6 densimeter thresholds.

If the values found are outside required tolerances replace the densimeter.
Tightening of
mountings
Check and adjust, with a torque wrench, the tightening torques of screws on
sub--assemblies not subjected to gas pressure. The tightening torques are
given in paragraph Tightening torques.
Relay operation
Check relay operation by executing the following circuit--breaker sequences :

-- closing lock--out,
-- automatic opening (where applicable),
-- anti--pumping.
Tightening
LV terminals
With the electric cubicle out of service, check that the connectors and tips of
conductors are tightened correctly and check the torque of connection
mountings.
Tool used : 4 mm diameter screw driver , for terminals of the Entrelec type
(for example).
CAUTION :
SCREWS
OVER--TIGHTENED.
ON
TERMINALS
MUST
NOT
BE
Insulating envelopes
Check the condition of insulating envelopes, these should be free from impact
marks, splintering, cracks, dust deposits, pollution etc...
If necessary, clean these using a dry rag.
If anomalies are found contact :
ALSTOM Grid, After--sales Service in order to change the defective parts.
Interrupting
chambers
Check the condition of interrupting chambers. This operation necessitates

complete dismantling of the interrupting chamber to gain access to the
elements to be inspected and should obligatorily be performed by ALSTOM
Grid, After--sales Service -- to be contacted before all operations of this kind,
preferably at the maintenance planning stage.
01--2011
L51--004EN/05
6/6
GRID
Maintenance

Estimation
Electrical wear can be determined by means of the curve below. This

curve corresponds with the formula :
NI2 = 28,000 kA2 (*)
N = number of interruptions on value I.
Example : it is possible to perform 70 interruptions on a current of 20 kA.
(*) Normal guarantee. In certain special operation conditions, other values
may be guaranteed.
Diagram
I (kA)
63
20
10
10
20 30
50
100
500
1000
3000
Number of interruptions
01--2011
L51--053EN/03
1/2
GRID
Maintenance
01--2011
L51--053EN/03
2/2
GRID
Maintenance
Presentation
Necessary tools
List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation :

Mark
Diagram
Designation
Gauge
0...0,765 MPa
(11)
Gauge
0...1 MPa
In this module
Reference
Number
HBL--02842117
+
HB0005499001
1
HBL--02842118
+
HB0005499001
(17)
Pressure reducer
0...1 MPa
HBL--02557392
+
HBLN55161601
(5)
Connection valve
block
HB0005649001
Set of seals
HB0000270121
Test lamp
HBL--02861501

Topic
Page
2
3
4
6
7
8
Preparing the densimeter

Linking the densimeter on the control tool
Densimeter threshold inspection
Replacing the densimeter
Putting away the control tool
Particular case with two (2) densimeters
09--2011
L51--108EN/05
1/8
GRID
Maintenance
Preparing the densimeter

Introduction
The densimeter is located at the base of the pole of the circuit--breaker, and
is joined to the SF6 (or SF6+CF4) gas volume of the circuit--breaker.
To realize the electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection, it is
imperative to isolate the densimeter volume from the pole SF6 (or SF6+CF4)
gas volume.
Process
The table below gives the process to preparing the densimeter :

Step
1
Action
Remove the densimeter
(1), held in place by
screws (8), on the
housing cover (2) of the
circuit--breaker.
Diagram
x3
8
2
H M6--20
Remove the screws (14).
x3
14
H M6--20
09--2011
Install the seal (16) on the

connection valve block
(5).
Install the connection

valve block (5) on the
housing cover (2), of the
circuit--breaker,
using
screws (8).
Install the densimeter (1)
on the connection valve
block (5) using screws
(14).
NOTE : Before installing, check the presence of seals on the
densimeter.
16
5
x3
x3
8
H M6--20
0,7 daN.m
14
1
H M6--20
0,7 daN.m
L51--108EN/05
2/8
GRID
Maintenance
Linking the densimeter on the control tool

Process
The table below gives the process to link the densimeter on the control
tool :
Step
1
Action
Check
that
the
REGULATION screw
(20) -- of the gauge (11) -is in valve closed
position (screwed).
Connect the pipe (12) of

the gauge (11) on the
valve
(24)
of
the
connection valve block
(5).
Diagram
11
20
5
12
24
11
12
Briefly open the SF6 gas

bottle tap (21) and the
cock (22) of the pressure
reducer to eliminate any
air inside the pipe (23)
(approx. 20 s at low
flow--rate).
Connect the pipe (23) on
the valve (10) of the
gauge (11).
11
21
10
23
22
SF6
09--2011
L51--108EN/05
3/8
GRID
Maintenance
Densimeter threshold inspection

SF6 gas pressure
adjustment
The table below gives the steps of SF6 gas pressure adjustment of the
connection valve block (5) :
Step
1
2
3
Action
Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (21)
and adjust gas output by acting on
the cock (22) of the pressure
Close the tap (21) from time to
gauge (11).
Comment
See the module Calculation

of the SF6 gas filling
pressure to using the
pressure gauge (tool).
Start filling again until the required

pressure is reached.
Close in this order : the tap (21),
then the cock (22).
21
11
Open
SF6
Closed
22
09--2011
L51--108EN/05
4/8
GRID
Maintenance
Densimeter threshold inspection, continued

Testing
The table below gives the steps of densimeter testing :

Step
1
Action
Connect a test lamp to the
Alarm pressure for the
insulation pae densimeter
threshold.
Calculate
the
effective
pressure at which the Alarm
pressure
for
the
insulation pae contact
switches over -- corrected in
keeping with temperature and
local atmospheric pressure.
D Create
a
leak
by
unscrewing
the
REGULATION screw (20) -of the gauge (11) --, making
sure that the contact switches
over at the previously
calculated value.
D Proceed in the same way
to check the contact of
Minimal pressure for the
insulation pme.
Comment
Connection to the terminal block of
the operating mechanism in
accordance with the electrical
diagram.
Value pae : see technical
characteristics).
See the module Calculation of
the SF6 gas filling pressure to
using the pressure gauge
(tool).
11
20
If one of the thresholds does not

comply with the specified value,
replace the densimeter.
09--2011
L51--108EN/05
5/8
GRID
Maintenance
Replacing the densimeter

Process
The table below gives the process to replace the densimeter :

Step
1
Action
Disconnect the pipe (12)
from the valve (24) of the
connection valve block (5).
Screw the valve--cap (25) on
the valve (24).
Diagram
24
12
25
5
Remove the densimeter (1),

held in place by screws (14),
on the connection valve
block (5).
x3
14
H M6--20
3
09--2011
Remove the connection

valve block (5), held in place
by screws (8), on the housing
cover
(2)
of
the
circuit--breaker.
NOTE : If the connection
valve block (5) is any
more used, see the next
paragraph Putting away
the control tool.
x3
Install new seals (26) and

(27) on the densimeter (1),
referring to Preparing and
installing static seals in
Erection
general 2
procedures.
Install the densimeter (1) on 27
the housing cover (2), of the
circuit--breaker,
using 26
screws (8).
1
H M6--20
x3
8
H M6--20
0,7 daN.m
L51--108EN/05
6/8
GRID
Maintenance
Putting away the control tool

Process
The table below gives the steps of putting away the control tool :
Step
1
Action
Take
precautions
to
remove the seal (16) from
the connection valve block
(5) and put it away into the
SET OF SEALS box of
the densimeter threshold
inspection case.
Install screws (14) on the
connection valve block (5)
Put away the connection
valve block (5) into the
case.
Diagram
16
5
x3
5
14
H M6--20
Disconnect the pipe (23)

from the valve (10) of the
gauge (11).
11
10
SF6
09--2011
23
L51--108EN/05
7/8
GRID
Maintenance
Special case with two densimeters

Instructions
09--2011
If the apparatus is equipped with a second densimeter, repeat the

operations on pages two to seven.
L51--108EN/05
8/8
GRID
Maintenance
Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device
Presentation
Warning
BEFORE ALL INTERVENTION ON THE OPERATING DEVICE, MAKE

SURE THAT THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER IS OPEN ANDITS POSITIONINDICATOR IS IN THE POSITION BELOW.
Circuit--breaker
Open
Closing spring
Released
NEVER WORK THE OPERATING DEVICE WHEN THIS IS NOT COUPLED

TO THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER.
In this module

Topic
Positions of optical signalization
Safety measures
Replacing an opening or closing electro--magnet
Resumption of service
Lubrication
Cleaning the windows
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
L51--304EN/04
1/10
GRID
Maintenance
Positions of optical signalization

A position
Circuit--breaker
Open
Closing spring
Loaded
B position
Circuit--breaker
Closed
Closing spring
Released
C position
Circuit--breaker
Closed
Closing spring
Loaded
Circuit--breaker
Open
Closing spring
Released
D position
01--2011
L51--304EN/04
2/10
GRID
Maintenance
Safety measures
Circuit--breaker
general preparing
The table below gives the steps to prepare the circuit--breaker to work safely :
Step
1
2
3
Release the springs
Action
Comment
Isolate the circuit--breaker from Shut down the circuit--breaker,
the network.
de--energize and earth it.
Switch--off the supply circuit of
the reloading motor.
Check the SF6 pressure gas. Make sure that the SF6 pressure
gas is pme.
Below this level, no mechanical
operating is allowed.
The table below gives the procedure to release the closing spring and the
opening spring depending the circuit--breaker state :
If the circuit--breaker
position is ...
Closed
Open
Check the optical

signalization
In the operating device, activate the

opening handle and the closing handle like below :
1 -- Open
2 -- Close
3 -- Open
Activate the closing handle and the
opening handle like below :
1 -- Close
2 -- Open
Check that the operating mechanisms optical signalization shows the symbols below :
Circuit--breaker
Open
01--2011
Action
Closing spring
Released
L51--304EN/04
3/10
GRID
Maintenance

Introduction
In order to perform certain maintenance operations inside the operating device it is necessary to remove some cabinet parts.
Removing
side panels
The table below gives the steps of side panels removing :

Step
1
Action
Remove the nuts (2) from
the left side panel (3).
Diagram
x2
2
M8
3
2
01--2011
Take hold of the left side

panel (3) from underneath,
pull slightly towards the outside, then downwards to remove it.
Proceed in the same way

for the right side panel.
L51--304EN/04
4/10
GRID
Maintenance
Replacing an opening or closing electro-- magnet

Process
01--2011
The table below gives the steps of replacing an opening or closing electro--magnet :
Step
1
Action
Disconnect the supply wires from
the coil (9).
Diagram
Extract the blade spring (10) by

pressing outwards on the rivet with
a finger.
Remove the core (11).
10
Remove the faulty coil and replace

it by a new one carrying the same
reference.
11
Reinstall the core (11).
Reinstall the blade spring (10).
Connect supply wires to the new

coil (9).
10
L51--304EN/04
5/10
GRID
Maintenance
Resumption of service
Installing the side
panels
Insert the side panel (3) under the edge of the roof plate (4). Press it down to
insert the mounting screws and fasten using new nuts (2).
4
3
x2
2
M8
1,6 daN.m
01--2011
L51--304EN/04
6/10
GRID
Maintenance
Resumption of service, continued

Energizing
The table below gives the resumption of service steps of the circuit--breaker
pole :
Step
1
2
Check the optical

signalization
Action
Comment
Re--energize the closing and
opening circuits.
Switch--on the motor supply cir- The motor starts--up and recuit.
loads the closing spring.
Check that the operating mechanisms optical signalization shows the symbols below :
Circuit--breaker
Open
Conclusion
01--2011
Closing spring
Loaded
The circuit--breaker is ready for normal use.
L51--304EN/04
7/10
GRID
Maintenance
Lubrication
Principle
No future lubrication will be necessary. The bearings and rollers have been
lubricated in our workshops with special grease :
ASEOL SYLITEA 4--018
This grease can easily endure very low temperatures and has an excellent
resistance to ageing. So that its qualities are not modified during use, it is prohibited to :
D Mix this grease with any other lubricant.
D Lubricate later with any other oil.
D Spray parts of the apparatus with a protective liquid against corrosion or
with any kind of lubricating oil.
Mixture with other lubricants can cause the layer of grease to become too
hard.
01--2011
L51--304EN/04
8/10
GRID
Maintenance
Cleaning the windows

Recommended
product
To clean the windows, use exclusively soapy water.
DO NOT USE SCOURING PAD.
01--2011
L51--304EN/04
9/10
GRID
Maintenance
01--2011
L51--304EN/04
10/10
GRID
Annexes
Presentation
Introduction
Special tooling is necessary for :

+ commissioning,
, maintenance of the circuit--breaker.
Only the tools and accessories specified on ordering are delivered.
Commercially available tools (e.g. : spanners, torque wrenches, spirit
levels...) are not supplied.
In this module

Topic
Page
2
6
Special tools
Accessories
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
1/8
GRID
Annexes
Special tools
Table of special
tools
The table below gives the ALSTOM special tools (SF6 case) :
NUMBER
DESIGNATION
HBLD001875..
+,
EMPTY
TRANSPORT
CASE
(OPTIONAL)
HBLN55000401
+,
FILLING TOOL
HBL--02842117
+
HB0005499001
+,
HBL--02842118
+
HB0005499001
+,
USE
Transport of SF6 gas
filling tools and
control tools.
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
SF6 filling,
topping--up.
PRESSURE
GAUGE
0...0,765 MPa
SF6 filling,
topping--up.
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
PRESSURE
GAUGE
0...1 MPa
HBL465059004
,
WATER
PRESSURE
GAUGE
(OPTIONAL) ,
Checking for leaks
HBL--02557392
+
HBLN55161601
+,
PRESSURE
REDUCER
0...1 MPa
SF6 filling,
topping--up.
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
HB0005649001
,
CONNECTION
VALVE BLOCK
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
HB0000270121
,
SET OF SEALS
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
2/8
GRID
Annexes
Special tools, continued

Table of special
tools, continued
The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM special tools :

NUMBER
DESIGNATION
USE
HB0001652002
+,
(x4/station)
LIFTING STRAP
(3m)
Handling of the pole.
HB0001652001
+,
(x4/station)
LIFTING STRAP
(6m)
HBL--02236071
+
(x4/station)
LIFTING
SHACKLE
HBLD00786901
+
(x8/station)
WASHER
Handling
of the column.
HBLN55069303
+
(x4/station)
RING BOLT
Handling
of the column.
HB0004570001
+
(x1/pole
installed in
factory)
HB0000482002
+,
(x1/station)
Blocking tool of the

pole operating shaft
BLOCKING TOOL
for
replacing
the
operating device.
CENTRING
SPINDLES
Chambers/column
coupling.
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
3/8
GRID
Annexes

Table of special
tools, continued

NUMBER
DESIGNATION
USE
HB0015532001
+,
(x1/station)
STOP
Chambers/column
coupling.
HB0000571001
+,
(x1/station)
LEVER
Installing the
operating device.
HB0000504001
+,
(x1/station)
PROTECTION
Chambers/column
coupling.
HB0015511001
+,
(x1/station)
COUPLING PIN
Chambers/column
coupling.
HBLN55001903
+
VACUUM PUMP
110/220V
50 Hz (4,5 m3/h)
Vacuum operation
in pole.
HBLN55001904
+
VACUUM PUMP
115/230V
60 Hz (4,5 m3/h)
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
4/8
GRID
Annexes

Table of special
tools, continued

NUMBER
DESIGNATION
USE
HBLN55000406
+
UNIVERSAL
CONNECTION
1/2 GAZ
AND
1/2 NPT
Vacuum operation
in pole.
HBLD00001901
+,
LEAK
DETECTOR
Checking
gas--tightness of SF6
filling plug. SF6 leak
detection.
TEST LAMP
Inspection of
densimeter
thresholds.
Inspection of
interruption contact
wear.
CRANK HANDLE
Spring reloading.
HBL--02861501
,
HB0005220001
FK3--2
,
HB0006053007
FK3--4 / FK3--5
,
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
5/8
GRID
Annexes
Accessories
Table of accessories
The table below gives the ALSTOM accessories :

NUMBER
HBL--01861432
+,
DESIGNATION
USE
42 kg
SF6 BOTTLE
SF6 filling topping--up.
SF6 BOTTLE
SF6 BOTTLE
SF6 BOTTLE
CF4 BOTTLE
CF4 filling
topping--up.
CF4 BOTTLE
CF4 filling
topping--up.
HBL--01818336
LOCTITE 262
(50 ml)
Screw locking.
HBL--01818327
LOCTITE 225
(250 ml)
Screw sealing.
HBL--01835265
MOLYKOTE 111
GREASE
Preparation
of SF6 seals.
HBL--01835203
GREASE
MOBILUX EP3
Lubricating screws
before tightening
to torques.
HBL--01861435
+,
HBL--01861434
+,
HBL--01861443
+,
HBL--01861455
+,
HBL--01861454
+,
23 kg
10 kg
8 kg
32 kg
14 kg
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
6/8
GRID
Annexes
Accessories, continued
Table of accessories,
continued
The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM accessories :

NUMBER
03--2012
DESIGNATION
USE
HBL--01835106
VASELINE
(80 g)
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--01835118
CONTACTAL
GREASE
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--01835251
GREASE
ASEOL
General lubrication.
HBL--02212337
SCOTCH BRITE
A -- VF
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--01831320
ABRASIVE
PAPER
A 400
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--02212334
RAG
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--02211842
ROUND BRUSH
N4
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--02211831
BRUSH
N16
Preparation of
electrical contact
surfaces.
HBL--01861262
CAN OF
ISOPROPANOL
(1 l)
Preparation of SF6
seals.
L60--028EN/02
7/8
GRID
Annexes
03--2012
L60--028EN/02
8/8
GRID
GRID
High Voltage Switchgear
SUMMARY
of PRODUCT SAFETY SHEETS

for equipment * manufactured by
ALSTOM GRID - AHT
SUBJECT
Reference N
Revision
Summary
PS 0000EN
04
Working environment
PS 0001EN
03
Handling Operations
PS 0002EN
03
Pressurized Equipment
PS 0003EN
03
SF6 : Use and Handling.
PS 0004EN
03
Chemicals
PS 0005EN
03
Electrical Equipment
PS 0006EN
03
Machinery
PS 0007EN
04
Operation
PS 0008EN
04
Maintenance
PS 0009EN
04
Remarks
Not applicable to pneumatically

operated circuit breakers
* : excluding lightning arresters.
PS 0000EN
04
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2001-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/1
Signature
Page
GRID
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
WORKING
ENVIRONMENT
CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Any negligence as regards site organisation may cause an accident.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
All remedial action, for all life-cycles of the equipment, must be carried out in a safe working
environment.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID
DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.
PS 0001EN
03
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
TRANSPORT
INSTALLATION
START-UP
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
GRID
1 Personnel :
-
Appropriate clothing, gloves, helmet, safety

boots, harness, etc..
The personnel concerned must be familiar with

the basic working regulations governing a given
work station: mechanical, dielectric, pressure
hazards, etc..
2 Handling Equipment :
-
This must be in good working order, regularly

maintained, properly adjusted and compliant
with the standards in force in the country of use.
3 Tools in General :
-
Only use tools appropriate to the type of work to

be carried out.
4 Working Area :
-
Make sure the floor is safe (free from oil, blunt

objects, etc.).
The site must be properly demarcated and kept

clear.
PS 0001EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/2
Page
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
HANDLING OPERATIONS

Any handling operation may involve danger :
for the personnel,
- for the equipment being handled,

- for the installations or equipment in the vicinity.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
As a general rule, handling operations must be carried out by personnel familiar with the basic
handling regulations, using equipment in good working order, and wearing the appropriate
protective clothing or equipment.
Ensure that the condition of the cases is such that they can be safely handled (state of the wood,
shock-resistance, etc.).

PS 0002EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
1/3
Page
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
TRANSPORT
INSTALLATION
START-UP
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
GRID
Handling operations must be carried out by personnel

familiar with the basic handling regulations.
Personnel must be qualified to operate

equipment, cranes, overhead conveyors, etc..
lifting
Equipment in proper working order :

-
Equipment must be checked and maintained

regularly in accordance with local regulations.
All equipment must be properly housed.
Familiarity with the load to be handled (see details on

the case).
Use of the appropriate handling equipment :

-
Type of sling(s),
Correct slinging methods,
Use of special ALSTOM handling equipment.
Follow the handling instructions on :

-
the cases (pictorial symbols: centre of gravity,

slinging points, etc.),
the assembly instructions.
Compliance with the relevant work station safety

instructions (proximity of electrical equipment).
Operator Safety :
-
use of gloves, helmets, safety boots, etc.,
loads not to be carried with personnel underneath.
PS 0002EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/3
Page
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
Ensure that cases have not been damaged during

handling or prolonged storage.
Follow the stacking instructions.
It is essential to open cases from the top and to take

care when unpacking.
operated
Bring insulating jacket working pressure back to

transport pressure (300 hPa maximum).
PS 0002EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
OPERATION
Before
handling
any
mechanically
component, disable the springs.
START-UP
INSTALLATION
Handling of insulating jackets at transport pressure (300

hPa maximum).
TRANSPORT
Before
handling
any
hydraulically
operated
component, bring oil pressure back to atmospheric
pressure.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
MAINTENANCE
GRID
2011-03-21
Revision date
3/3
Page
GRID
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT

Our equipment includes gas pressure assemblies (SF6, nitrogen, air, etc.) or fluids (oil).
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
Comply with the storage, transport and operating instructions supplied with our equipment.
Before initial filling and pressurizing, check the overall condition of the shielding concerned :
-
no signs of impact, splitting or chipping on the porcelain components, etc.,
no visible damage to hoses and/or rigid pipes (cuts, folds, corrosion, etc.) or to fittings and
metal protection (accumulators, tank, etc.).
As a general rule, all work on pressurized equipment must be carried out by qualified personnel.
PS 0003EN
03
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/3
Signature
Page
INSTALLATION
START-UP
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
TRANSPORT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
GRID
Pressurized Equipment : General.

1.1
Comply with the assembly instructions shown

on both our equipment and the gas bottles.
1.2
Before starting work on any pressurized piece

of equipment, make sure there is no pressure.
1.3
Before any handling, check to see how the

equipment is fixed to its frame and how the
frame is itself anchored.
1.4
High-pressure pipes must be fixed or otherwise

made safe.
1.5
Before initial pressurization, check that all

circuits are properly sealed.
1.6
Never tighten a pressure fitting.
1.7
Ensure that for every bolted connection for a

volume under pressure there is an appropriate
and properly fastened bolt at each relevant
point.
1.8
It is strictly forbidden to lift or otherwise move a

piece of equipment inflated to a pressure in
excess of 300 hPa of gas.
1.9
Before giving any orders to move equipment,

check visually or by ear that all the relevant
pipe fittings are tight.
1.10 Comply with the standard instructions

governing the use of compressed gas bottles
(e.g. keep the bottle away from any source of
heat).
PS 0003EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/3
Page
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
START-UP
INSTALLATION
TRANSPORT
PACKING
OPERATION
GRID
2.1
See SF6 Safety Sheet.
2.2
An effective pressure of 300 hPa, used for the

transport and storage of our products, is not
regarded as a potential hazard.
2.3
Always fill the unit using the appropriate

equipment, which should include a safety
valve.
2.4
Do not inflate over and above the prescribed

pressure.
2.5
It is strictly forbidden to release SF6 to

atmosphere. All discharged gas must without
exception be recovered.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SF6 Pressure Equipment.
Hydraulic Equipment.
3.1
Circuit Purging.
This must be done under pressure. Use the
appropriate equipment.
3.2
Hydraulic Control Unit.

The doors must be kept shut except when
control tests are being carried out.
PS 0003EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
3/3
Page
GRID
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
SF6
Use and Handling

Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a gas which in its basic state is colourless, odourless and tasteless. It is
not toxic, but it cannot sustain life. It is a heavy gas that is dispersed slowly into the atmosphere.
In its natural state, SF6 is delivered and stored in pressurized tanks (bottles or spheres) at a pressure
of approximately 20 bar at 20C (in its liquid form) and complies with IEC standard 376.
However, under the effect of the electric arc, the SF6 molecules break up and the elements mostly
recombine during cooling either due to extinction of the arc or by regeneration caused by the
presence of active absorbent charges within the circuit breaker.
Various chemical reactions, associated with the volatilization of the materials in contact with the
electric arc, create either fluoridized or sulphurous secondary gas products or solid products in the
form of metallic fluoride powder ; or again, in the presence of traces of water or moisture,
hydrofluoric acid or sulphur dioxide.
In the life-cycle of the equipment, SF6 can be observed not only in its pure state, but also in its
contaminated state :
-
the use of new SF6 for filling or adding,
leaks under normal operating conditions,
maintenance involving the opening of circuit breakers containing old SF6 (decomposition
products),
abnormal conditions (internal arc fault causing the shielding to break),
circuit breaker recycling on end of life-cycle.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
Follow the instructions for the transport of pressurized containers.
The storage of these containers is governed by the same storage regulations as compressed gas
bottles :
-
keep away from any source of heat and in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area,
always fit a pressure reducing valve.
PS 0004EN
03
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/3
Signature
Page
GRID
Whilst SF6 in its pure state is not toxic, the decomposition products have varying degrees of toxicity.
They may irritate the skin, the eyes and the mucous membranes; and in massive amounts may
cause serious lesions (oedema, heart failure, circulatory disorders and unconsciousness).
However, very rapidly and before there is any real danger, signs such as a pungent smell, irritation
of the mucous of the nose, the eyes and the mouth will give a warning and the personnel
concerned will have sufficient time to take the necessary safety actions.
Where the gas is used or handled within enclosed premises, ensure adequate ventilation,
especially low down.
If the gas is inhaled, the area concerned must be evacuated immediately.
Under normal operating conditions, leaks are exceptionally minor and not critical, even when the
gas contains impurities (due to the regenerating filters in the circuit breaker).
Filling and where necessary topping up operations must be carried out using the appropriate tools.
During maintenance operations, or at the end of the life-cycle, dust inside the equipment must be
removed by a vacuum extractor and the operator should wear a mask. Gas recovery must be
carried out using the appropriate gas recovery equipment.
Gases and decomposition products must be treated and/or disposed of by specialist organizations.
Under extremely abnormal conditions (e.g. break in the shielding) in an enclosed space, individual
protective equipment is recommended.
Lastly, it is forbidden to smoke, drink, eat or keep food in the vicinity of open SF6 equipment,
whether indoors or outside (harmful dust).
It is essential that both the fitter and the user read IEC Technical Report 1634 regarding the use and
handling of sulphur hexafluoride gas.
PS 0004EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/3
Page
Contaminated SF6
PS 0004EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
Pure SF6
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
START-UP
TRANSPORT
Transport of SF6
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION
PACKING
GRID
3/3
Page
GRID
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
CHEMICALS

Generally speaking, the products used for installation and commissioning are bought chemical
products, namely :
-
Hydraulic oil
Grease
Loctite
Touching-up paint
Isopropanol
Drying agents
These must be kept in their original packing and the tops replaced after use.
Some packing products require careful handling as they may contain preservatives.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
As a general rule, chemical products must be used and stored away from any source of heat.
Smoking is to be avoided.
Avoid contact with the skin and any splashes to the eyes.
Take the basic health and safety precautions.
Products and packing must be destroyed in accordance with local environmental regulations.
Other products: SF6 (see relevant sheet)
PS 0005EN
03
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
Hydraulic Oil
Consumables (Grease & Paint) (Isopropanol)
Loctite
PS 0005EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
TRANSPORT
Drying Agents
START-UP
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
GRID
X
X
2/2
Page
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Our equipment is subjected to high and low tension loads that could expose the personnel to the
risk of electrocution.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
The operating company is responsible for ensuring compliance with the safety instructions
governing high tension.
The basic regulations in respect of low tension installations must also be complied with.
All work on high-tension networks and low-tension installations must be performed by qualified
operators wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.
PS 0006EN
03
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
INSTALLATION
START-UP
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
TRANSPORT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
GRID
High Tension.
1.1 Comply with the regulations governing the work
station.
1.2 In the case of items equipped with capacitors,
make sure they are discharged prior to removal
and short-circuited while work is being carried out.
Low Tension.
2.1 Prior to any work on the low-tension circuit or
equipment, cut off the power supply.
2.2 When replacing an electrical component on the

control equipment, follow the safety instructions
shown in the "Machinery" safety sheet.
PS 0006EN
Sheet N
03
Revision
1996-04-04
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/2
Page
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
MACHINERY

Our equipment contains moving parts (linkage, levers, etc.), reserve power (springs, accumulators,
etc.) and pressurized sheathing ; the associated hazards are dealt with in safety sheet "Pressurized
Equipment" PS 0003/A.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
Follow the relevant ALSTOM operating and maintenance instructions.
Prior to any work on the control equipment and the motion transfer mechanism, disable the springs
on mechanically operated units and bring pressure back to zero for hydraulically operated units.
As a general rule, work on the control equipment and transmissions must be performed by qualified
operators wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.
PS 0007EN
04
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
START-UP
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
2.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off all power to
the reset motor.
2.2 Deactivate the opening and closing springs in

accordance with ALSTOM instructions.
2.3 Make sure that all safety rules are complied with
while the work is being carried out.
3.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off power to

the motor pump.
3.2 Reduce the pressure of the hydraulic circuit to

zero.
Moving Parts.
1.1 Before any work is carried out on transmission

components, ensure that the control equipment
has been deactivated.
2
TRANSPORT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
INSTALLATION
GRID
Spring-operated Mechanism.
Hydraulic Mechanism.
PS 0007EN
Sheet N
04
Revision
1996-04-04
1st issue
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/2
Page
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
OPERATION

If the unit shows any sign of an unwanted condition, it must be examined by the user.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
The operators concerned must be suitably qualified and must comply with the normal operating
and maintenance instructions issued by ALSTOM.
Depending on the severity of the fault observed, the necessary corrective measures must be taken,
e.g :
- replenish the SF6 gas in the event of a leak,

-
isolate the system in the event of a major malfunction.

PS 0008EN
04
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
INSTALLATION
START-UP
COMPLY WITH THE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTION PROVIDED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES :
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
TRANSPORT
PACKING
GRID
Opening malfunction :
-
to do with the sequencing chain,

following a mechanical fault.
Cut-off failure.
External dielectric flash-over.
SF6 pressure drop due to either :

-
major leak (switch to 2nd threshold),

no 1st threshold alarm complement.
Loss of motor power :

-
oil, compressed air, component failure.
Activation of safety device, if fitted.

Use
only
the
appropriate
recommended by ALSTOM.
Abnormal noise.
PS 0008EN
Sheet N
04
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
products
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/2
Page
GRID
SAFETY SHEET
MAINTENANCE

To ensure safe and unimpaired operation of the equipment, regular maintenance is essential.
Neglected maintenance can create hazards.
Maintenance operations involve hazards that must be guarded against.
WORK REQUIREMENTS.
Comply with the maintenance programme and service intervals shown in the ALSTOM manuals.
In addition, every maintenance operation must comply with the following requirements :
-
it must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel,
both the work involved and the associated hazards must be clearly identified beforehand,
the tools and equipment used (standard or specific to ALSTOM) must be appropriate and in
proper working order,
any replacement parts must be ALSTOM parts.
Refer to the relevant SAFETY sheets.
The safety instructions below are general and not exhaustive. They should therefore be
modified and/or supplemented for all specific maintenance operations to be carried out.
PS 0009EN
04
G. BERNARD
1998-08-12
Sheet N
Revision
Written by
Date
Signature
J. VIAT
2011-03-21
Approved by
Date
1/2
Signature
Page
MAINTENANCE
SCRAPPING &
RECYCLING
X
Obtain as much information as possible from the user

regarding the condition of the unit.
Check that the unit is earthed both upstream and

downstream.
Demarcate the work area.
Ensure that the operator is equipped with the personal

protective clothes and equipment required (safety
glasses, gloves, safety boots, harness, etc.).
Ensure that the equipment used is compliant and in

good condition (scaffolding, slings, suspended
platforms, electrical equipment, tools, etc.).
Ensure that the safety instructions in respect of each

particular hazard are complied with.
PS 0009EN
Sheet N
04
Revision
1996-03-18
1st issue
START-UP
INSTALLATION
TRANSPORT
Identify the equipment to be worked on and ensure it

is switched off.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PACKING
OPERATION
GRID
2011-03-21
Revision date
2/2
Page
Point--on--Wave Controller
Series RPH2
Service Manual
02--2004
58.020.034EN
GRID
02--2004
58.020.034EN
GRID
RPH2 Service Manual

CONTENTS
1. IN GENERAL
1.1. Handling of electronic equipment
1.2. Unpacking
1.3. Storage
1.4. Installation
1.5. Technical data
2. INTRODUCTION
2.1. Using the handbook
2.2. Models available, Assembly
2.3. Additional modules

2.3.1. Signal module: Option S
2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I
2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A
2.3.3.1 Option A0
2.3.3.2 Option A1
2.3.3.3 Option A3
2.3.3.4 List of available models
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
2.4. Elements on the front of the device

2.4.1. Graphic display
2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display
2.4.2. Key-operated switch
2.4.2.1 Position "OFF"
2.4.2.2 Position "OPERATION"
2.4.3. LED indicators
2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green)
2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red)
2.4.4. Keys
2.4.5. Serial interface
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
2.5. Menu system

2.5.1. Menu structure
12
14
3. APPLICATION NOTES
16
3.1. General Description of the Functions

3.1.1. Synchronized switching
3.1.1.1 Closing
3.1.1.2 Opening
16
16
16
17
Page 1/73
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02-12
Compiled:
2004-02-12
THS/ U.Samitz
Approved:
2004-02-12
VEV/ K. Bauer
File code:
RPHDOC_E.DOC
3.1.2. Circuit breaker

3.1.3. RPH2 structure
3.1.4. Function of the RPH2
3.1.4.1 Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum
3.1.4.2 Breaking of an inductive current
3.1.4.3 Switching program
17
17
18
18
19
20
3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors

3.2.1. Closing
3.2.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral
3.2.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral
3.2.2. Opening
3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required
3.2.3.1 Closing
3.2.3.2 Opening
3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups

3.3.1. Closing
3.3.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral
3.3.2. Opening
3.3.3.1 Closing
3.3.3.2 Opening
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors

3.4.1. Closing
3.4.1.2.Networks with isolated Neutral
3.4.2. Opening
3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy
23
23
23
23
24
24
27
3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines
28
4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES
29
4.1 Signal Module: Option S

4.1.1 Alarm outputs
4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs
4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time
4.1.2.2 Remote reset
4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization
4.2 Analogue Module: Option A
4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation
4.2.2 Temperature Compensation
4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation
4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors
4.2.5 Adaptive Control
29
29
29
29
31
31
31
32
33
35
37
37
4.3 Current Module Option I
38
5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM
39
Page 2
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.1 System data

5.1.1 Password
5.1.2 System Frequency
5.1.3 Control Voltage
5.1.4 Rated Pressure
5.1.5 Switching Program
5.1.5.1 User Program
5.1.6 Function Channel 1
5.1.7 Language
5.1.8 Time / Date
5.1.9 New Password
5.1.10 Selftest Start
5.1.11 Selftest Interval
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
42
42
42
42
43
43
5.2 CB Data
5.2.1 Operating Time CH1
5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1
5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1
5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor
5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1
5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times
5.2.8 Compensation
5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1
5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1
5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1
5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1
5.2.12.1 Delta_t xxC
44
44
44
44
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
48
5.3 Analogue Data

5.3.1 Thresholds
5.3.1.1 Current max.
5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max.
5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min.
5.3.1.4 Temperature max.
5.3.1.5 Temperature min.
5.3.1.6 Pressure max.
5.3.1.7 Pressure min.
5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim
5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec
5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage
5.3.5 Temperature
5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA
48
48
48
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
53
Page 3
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.3.6 Pressure
53
53
54
5.4 Alarms
5.4.1 Reset Obligatory
5.4.2 Lock-Out
5.4.3 Alarm List
5.4.3.1 Lock-out
5.4.3.2 Frequency min
5.4.3.3 Frequency max.
5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak)
5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure
5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure
5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate
5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded
5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated
5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR
5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR
5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min
5.4.3.15 Operating Time min
5.4.3.16 Operating Time max.
5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure
5.4.3.18 Archive Full
5.4.3.19 Archive Failure
5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min
5.4.3.22 Temperature min
5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault
5.4.3.25 Pressure min
5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault
54
54
55
55
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
5.5 Measurement
5.5.1 Current Graphs
5.5.2 Measured Times
5.5.2.1 Command OUT
5.5.2.2 CB Signal received
5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time
5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time
5.5.3 Frequency
5.5.4 Current (RMS)
5.5.6 Actual Temperature
5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation
5.5.8 Additional Operating Times
5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1
5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2
5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1
5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1
60
60
61
61
61
62
62
62
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
65
65
65
65
Page 4
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)

5.5.10 Pressure (L1)
66
66
5.6 Auxiliary functions

5.6.1 Alarm Input
5.6.2 Alarm Output
5.6.3 Error Type
66
66
67
67
5.7 Switching archive
67
6 COMMISSIONING
68
6.1 Commissioning preliminaries

6.1.1 Settings
6.1.1.1 Factory Settings
6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings
6.1.2 Inspection
6.1.3 First operation
68
68
68
68
69
70
Page 5
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
1.
IN GENERAL
1.1. Handling of electronic equipment

A person can cause an electronic potential of many thousands of volts.
When this potential is discharged into appliances with semiconductor components,
serious damage can occur which is not immediately evident, but can still impair
operational reliability.
The electronic switching circuit of the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller meets all the
requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the
EN 50 081-1/1992 and EN 50 082-2/1995.
Care is necessary only if the plug-in unit is pulled out of the casing. Take care not to
touch the plug contact on the back! For storing and transporting loose plug-in units, we
recommend a conductive fail packaging.
As soon as the plug-in unit is properly installed in the casing, no safety measures are
necessary at all.
1.2. Unpacking
Despite the general robust construction of the Point-on-Wave Controller, it must be
handled with care before installation. Before accepting the Point-on-Wave Controller it
should be checked for damage which could have originated during transportation. If
you have cause for complaint, please refer to the transport company and notify a
person responsible at ALSTOM Grid.
1.3. Storage
If the Point-on-Wave Controller is not to be installed immediately upon receipt, it should
be stored in a place which is free of dust and moisture, in its original packaging. If a
moisture-absorption bag is in the packaging, leave it as it is. The effectiveness of the
drying agent is impaired if the non-protected bag is subjected to the surrounding
conditions.
Before the Point-on-Wave Controller is placed in the box again, warm the drying bag
slightly in order to regenerate the drying agent.
Storage temperature: -40 C to +70 C
1.4. Installation
The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller can either be installed in a switchboard or a
suitable frame with the provided material (panel cut-out see diagram 58.001.115), or a
special fitting is available for wall mounting (see diagram 58.001.116).
Page 6
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
We suggest the control room or the relays room as the most favourable installation site.
Installation in a heated outdoor control cubicle is also possible. Installation directly in
the operating mechanism of a circuit breaker is not provided for (please contact
ALSTOM Grid regarding this).
The position should be well lit in order to make inspections easier.
Wiring is carried out according to the wiring diagram which is enclosed with every
Point-on-Wave Controller. Take care to earth the housing appropriately.
1.5. Technical data

supply voltage
Nominal:
48 V - 250 VDC
(= CB trip coil voltage):
Operative range:
35 V - 300 VDC
special power supply for 48 V -44 % ANSI-Standard available
power consumption:
< 20 W
reference voltage (L1/N):
Nominal:
Operative range:
rated frequency:
power consumption of measuring inputs:
100/3 V; 220/3 V AC
15 V -105 VAC; 30 V - 250 VAC
16 2/3 / 50 / 60 Hz 10 %
< 2 VA
maximum permissible current of CB trip coil:

minimum command time:
polarity of command impulse:
resolution of time setting:
accuracy of switching times over
temperature range -55 C to +55 C
14.5 A/ phase for 1 sec.

100 ms
positive
0.1 ms
current inputs:
rated short time current:
accuracy of current measurement
1 A and 5 A
100 x In / 1 s
10% (0.5 In ... 4 In)
measurement control voltage

input temperature measurement:
input pressure measurement:
accuracy of measurement by RPH2:
control voltage
ambient temperature
hydraulic pressure
internal
4...20 mA of Pt 100
4...20 mA of pressure sensor
signalling inputs:
(e.g. CB or neutral ground disconnector position,
CB aux. contacts, external reset)
potential free contacts required
indication outputs:
contact rating
potential free contacts

24-250 V AC/DC 25 %,
max. 70 VA/ max. 3 A
communication port:
RS 232, DC decoupled
0.3 ms
3%
3%
3%
Page 7
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.
INTRODUCTION
2.1. Using the handbook

This handbook will guide the user through the setting-up procedure for the Point-onWave Controller.
It explains the additional functions of this appliance, and how they are selected and
used. In addition, some examples of its usage are given, the theory behind it examined
and explained, and which circuit breaker and main data are absolutely necessary for
operation.
The handbook shows the complete list of all menu points with cross-references to the
chapter with the accompanying descriptions. The menu point order for the individual
modules is shown on this list as well.
Notes on checking and commissioning are given in the last chapter.
2.2. Models available, Assembly

The RPH2 is available in 2 basic models:
RPH2-1xx:
for one switching function (closing or opening alternatively)
RPH2-2xx:
for 2 switching functions
channel 1 for closing, channel 2 for opening
(only when using the given switching programs)
The 7 alarm LED's are active, however there is only one alarm contact (Alarm 1)
available. In addition, there is an alarm contact "Device not ready".
The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is assembled in a modular system. The function
can be extended through the combination of various modules. Extending the function at
a later date is only possible by the manufacturer.
The casing is a standard 19 inch sub-rack, with half width for one device or
alternatively with full width for 2 devices. After removing the 4 external screws of the
front panel, the plug-in unit on the grip rail can be removed from the housing. Safety
notes see 1.1.
2.3. Additional modules

2.3.1. Signal module: Option S
This module offers 6 alarm outputs (alarm 2 to alarm 7) and 6 optoelectronic coupler
inputs. Inputs 1-3 serve as circuit breaker monitors via its auxiliary contacts. With this the
pole operating times can be measured. Resolution 0.5 ms.
Input 4 serves as an input for a remote-reset. Inputs 5 and 6 are not in use at present.
A further input is used for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be switched in parallel
with other Point-on-Wave Controllers.
Page 8
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I

With this the phase currents during the switching process can be recorded and
graphically displayed. Data from the last 4 switching operations (curves, amplitudes) are
stored in a non volatile memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are
shown after feeding in the current transformer ratios.
2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A

Independent of the breaking system and the kind of operating mechanism, the operating
times of a circuit breaker change in dependence on certain service parameters:
With reduced control voltage at the circuit breaker coil there is less energy available to
change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating time
extends itself. (Valid for all types of operations.)
By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry out
the switching movement changes.
The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical
resistance of the trip coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas are
dependent on the temperature. In addition, changes of length in the driving linkage and
the porcelains occur. All these parameters influence the operating time in different ways.
In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some
milliseconds. The RPH2 with option A is in the position to compensate these operating
time alterations.
There are inputs available for the measurements acquired when measuring the control
voltage, pressure and temperature for the compensation of pole operating times.
The control voltage is measured directly in the RPH2 at the input terminals for the
auxiliary voltage. There are no external measuring devices necessary.
For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer
banks (2 conductor constructions, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal
(4...20 mA) are necessary. The supply for the transducer bank is effected by the RPH2.
Up to 8 RPH2's can be switched in parallel on one temperature sensor. When measuring
pressure, an individual transducer is necessary for each circuit breaker (option A1) or
each circuit breaker pole (option A3). The measuring range of the measuring
instruments depends on the requirements and can be simply parameterized in the
RPH2.
Three types of this additional module are available:
2.3.3.1. Option A0
Measuring and compensation of control voltage and temperature (for springloaded
drives)
Page 9
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.3.3.2. Option A1
Same design as 2.3.3.1, however with additional measurement and compensation for
hydraulic pressure (for hydraulic drives which have a mutual pressure generation for all
three poles).
2.3.3.3. Option A3
Like 2.3.3.2, however for circuit breakers which have pressure generation per pole.
2.3.3.4. List of available models
RPH2-1
RPH2-2
RPH2-1S
RPH2-2S
RPH2-1I
RPH2-2I
RPH2-1A0
RPH2-2A0
RPH2-1A1
RPH2-2A1
RPH2-1A3
RPH2-2A3
RPH2-1SI
RPH2-2SI
RPH2-1SA0
RPH2-2SA0
RPH2-1SA1
RPH2-2SA1
RPH2-1SA3
RPH2-2SA3
RPH2-1SIA0 RPH2-1SIA1 RPH2-1SIA3

RPH2-2SIA0 RPH2-2SIA1 RPH2-2SIA3
2.4. Elements on the front of the device

The device identification is located on the right side of the grip rail. The top line shows
the model variation code and the serial number is located on the line beneath.
With any queries or questions please state both numbers.
2.4.1. Graphic display

To show the adjusted and measured values.
The top line shows each active menu point. Underneath four menu lines appear. The
last line (under the drawn line) is the status line. The feed in or measured values appear
here.
The digits which are pressed into the front panel underneath the display indicate the
positions for setting the alarms.
>
Sy s
Pa
Sy
Co
Ra
L1
t
s
s
n
t
em D a t a
swo r d
t em F r e q u e
t r o l Vo l t a
ed Pr essu r
00
12345
L2
L
n
g
e
0
6
3
cy
e
0
78
2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display

Turn key-operated switch to OFF.
Press the [Enter] button and hold it.
Turn the key-operated switch to OPERATION.
The contrast changes within its limits from dark to light.
When the optimal contrast for your requirements is reached, release the [Enter] button.
Page 10
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Note: The whole contrast-range of the display is adjustable. Therefore the display
becomes nearly transparent or dark respectively for a moment. The selected contrast is
stored in a non-volatile memory.
2.4.2. Key-operated switch

2.4.2.1. Position "OFF"
The RPH2 is blocked. No switching operation is possible. The green LED "READY" is
extinguished and the alarm contact "Device not Ready" (-X6: 12/13) closes.
2.4.2.2. Position "OPERATION"
After switching to this position the device carries out an internal test. After the averaging
of the analogue measured values (pressure, temperature, control voltage) is completed
(it takes approx. 20 sec.) and no failure is present, the device switches to "OPERATION"
and the green LED "READY" lights up. The alarm contact "Device not ready" (-X6:
12/13) opens.
2.4.3. LED indicators

2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green)
Status
Steady light
Function
The device is ready for operation
Dark
Key-operated switch in "OFF" position

Averaging of analogue measured values is still not
completed (see 1.2) Voltage reference is missing or
frequency is not in the permitted range (10 %)
The device has identified an internal failure.
Blinking
The password is activated, the device can be

parameterized. All functions are active.
2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red)
To show the parameterized alarms. The LED's are assigned to the alarm relays 1 to 7.
Next to the LED's is a window in which the user's message texts can be placed. For a
withdrawn cassette, the input tag with the texts is inserted from the top behind the front.
As insert use a sheet of paper 41 mm x 90 mm.
Status
Steady light
Function
An alarm has occurred. The LED remains alight until
the alarm is active (regardless of whether the "Quitt"
button has been pressed). As long as the LED is
alight, the affiliated output relay is also activated.
Page 11
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Status
Blinking
Function
An alarm has occurred which is marked as Rest
obligatory
After pressing the "Quitt" button two possibilities arise:
1) The LED extinguishes, i.e. the alarm was no longer
active when reseted, the output relay is released.
2) The indicator switches over to permanent light, i.e.
the alarm is still active, the output relay remains
energized.
As long as the LED is alight or blinks, the affiliated output relay is energized.
2.4.4. Keys
[Enter]
[+]
[-]
[Esc]
[Quitt]
Menu point open / confirm

Cursor up / increase value
Cursor down / decrease value
Leave menu point / break-off action
Acknowledge alarm / alter current scale (together with [+] or [-])
2.4.5. Serial interface

To connect the RPH2 to a computer via a standard interface cable.
Pinning of connection cable (Nullmodem Cable):
PC Serial Port
RPH2 Serial Port
PC Serial Port
RPH2 Serial Port
9 pin plug
9 pin plug
25 pin plug
9 pin plug
2.5. Menu system

The user surface is organized in several master menu points, each with linked submenu points. For their part, the sub-menus can contain further sub-menus. The last line
(under the drawn line) is the status line. Adjusted or measured values are shown here.
The menu structure depends on the RPH2 configuration, e.g. with a device without a
current measuring module (option I) menu points are not available which are connected
with his function. There are menu cells which can only be read and others where an
alteration to the setting can be carried out.
Changes are only possible after the password has been activated.
After feeding the auxiliary voltage, the first four lines of the master menu (1st plane)
appear on the display. Move the menu cursor (black triangle on the left side of the
display) up and down using the [+] an[-] keys. The first four lines of the 2nd plane are
shown after pressing [Enter]. Analogues are also valid for the 3rd plane. The menu
Page 12
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
cursor is moved again using [+] or [-]. The contents of the cells are shown in the status
line. If a value is to be altered, move the menu cursor to the desired plane and line.
After pressing [Enter], a blinking cursor appears under the first status line position.
Change this position using [+] or [-]. [Enter] moves the cursor right to the next position.
With [Esc] the input mode can be left at any time without storing the changes made.
After feeding in the last position the message
Accept: YES - NO
appears in the status line.
The input is confirmed with [Enter]. The new value is stored and the menu cursor
appears. [Esc] enables the input procedure to be repeated.
After completing the input, turn the key-operated switch to "OFF" and then to
"OPERATION" or start the selftest via the menu. After the selftest the data in the
system is accepted.
The following pages show a list of all the available menu points. The cross-references
to the chapter with the detailed function description are in the column "Chapt.".
The column "Module" shows with which model variation this menu is available.
The following coding system applies:
-1
RPH2 with one switching function
-2
RPH2 with two switching functions
Ax
Analogue module in all models with module A
A1
Analogue module, e.g. Option 1
I
Current measuring module Option I
S
Signal module Option S
Menu points without a particular task are available on all models.
Page 13
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
2.5.1. Menu structure

Chapter Module
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
Ax
5.1.4
Ax
5.1.5.
5.1.5.1
5.1.6
-1
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.10
5.1.11
Level 1
System Data
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.7.1
5.2.7.2
5.2.7.3
5.2.7.4
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.12.1
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
5.2.16
5.2.16.1
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.1.3
5.3.1.4
5.3.1.5
5.3.1.6
5.3.1.7
5.3.2
5.3.3
CB Data
Level 2
Level 3
Password
System Frequency
Control Voltage
Rated Pressure
Switching Program
User Program
Function CH1
Language
Time/Date
New Password
Selftest Start
Selftest Interval
Operating Time CH1

Operating Time CH2
Arcing Time CH1
Arcing Time CH2
Aux.Timeshift CH1
Aux.Timeshift CH2
Adaptive Control ->
S
S
SAx
SAx
SAx
SAx
SAx
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
Ax
Ax
Ax
Weighting Factor
Adaptive Times CH1
Adaptive Times CH2
Reset Adaptive Times
Compensation
kU1 Voltage CH1
kP1 Pressure CH1
Temp. Comp. CH1
Table Temp. CH1 ->
Delta_t xxC
kU2 Voltage CH2
kP2 Pressure CH2
Temp. Comp. CH2
Table Temp. CH2 ->
Delta_t xxC
Analogue Data
Thresholds
I
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
A1,A3
I
I
Page 14
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Current max (peak)

Control Voltage max
Control Voltage min
Temperature max
Temperature min
Pressure max
Pressure min
Rated Curr. prim
Rated Curr. sec
Chapter Module
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
5.3.5.2
5.3.6
5.3.6.1
5.3.6.2
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
5.4.3.3
5.4.3.4
5.4.3.5
5.4.3.6
5.4.3.7
5.4.3.8
5.4.3.9
5.4.3.10
5.4.3.11
5.4.3.12
5.4.3.13
5.4.3.14
5.4.3.15
5.4.3.16
5.4.3.17
5.4.3.18
5.4.3.19
5.4.3.20
5.4.3.21
5.4.3.22
5.4.3.23
5.4.3.24
5.4.3.25
5.4.2.26
5.4.3.27
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.3
5.5.2.4
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
Level 1
Analogue Data
(contin.)
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
A1,A3
A1,A3
Level 2
Level 3
Actual Contr. Voltage

Temperature
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Pressure
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Alarms
Reset obligatory
Lock-out
Alarm List
Lock-out
Frequency min
Frequency max
Current max (peak)
Ref. Voltage Failure
RTC Impulse Failure
Neutral intermediate
Neutral grounded
Neutral isolated
Selftest ERROR
Selftest CH1 ERROR
Selftest CH2 ERROR
Command Time CH1 min
Operating Time min
Operating Time max
Drive Mech. Failure
Archive Full
Archive Failure
Control Voltage min
Control Voltage max
Temperature min
Temperature max
Temp. Transd. Fault
Pressure min
Pressure max
Pressure Transd. Fault
I
S
-2
-2
S
S
S
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
A1,A3
A1,A3
Measurement
I
Current Graphs
Measured Times
Command OUT
CB Signal received
Calculated Op. Time
Measured Op. Time
S
Ax
S
I
Ax
Frequency
Current (RMS)
Control Voltage
Page 15
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Chapter Module
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.8.1
5.5.8.2
5.5.8.3
5.5.8.4
5.5.8.5
5.5.8.6
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.7
3.
Level 1
Measurement (contin.)
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
A1,A3
A1,A3
A3
A1
Level 2
Level 3
Temperature
Temperature f. Comp
Additional Op. Times
Voltage CH1
Voltage CH 2
Temperature CH1
Temperature CH2
Pressure CH1
Pressure CH2
Pressure (L1/L2/L3)
Pressure (L1)
Aux. Functions
S
S
Alarm Output
Alarm Input
Error Type
Switching Archive
APPLICATION NOTES
3.1. General Description of the Functions

The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is a three-phase control device for circuit breakers
with single pole drives. It can be used for both the energizing and de-energizing of high
voltage devices.
3.1.1. Synchronized switching

3.1.1.1. Closing
Energizing of transformers, reactors and capacitors is normally effected three-pole - for
all 3 phases simultaneously. In doing this the point on wave is left up to chance. If
closing is carried out in this manner, high inrush currents with high DC components are
unavoidable. When energizing capacitors additional high switching surges can occur.
The results are unwanted operation of protection devices and repercussions on
machines and network.
The inrush currents and switching surges can be reduced to an acceptable rate by
installing closing resistors at the circuit breaker. The costs for such closing resistors are
very high, due to the mechanical expenditure. Besides, the necessarily high energetic
absorbtivity of the resistor material sets relatively restricted limits of practicability.
By selecting a suitable switching time the physical causes of these high inrush currents
can be counteracted. This possibility is effected through synchronized switching with the
RPH2. This enables the three poles of a circuit breaker to be controlled independently.
Page 16
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.1.1.2. Opening
The de-energizing of shunt reactors is a critical process liable to generate re-ignitions
between circuit breaker contacts. This means very high stress for the insulation of both
the shunt reactor and the circuit breaker.
If the contact separation takes place a sufficient amount of time before the current zero
crossing through suitable circuit breaker control, to ensure a gap capable of withstanding
the transient recovery voltage at interruption.
3.1.2. Circuit breaker

The mechanical closing time of the circuit breaker is defined as the time between the
electrical command to the operating coil and touching of the main contacts.
On the other hand, the opening time is the time between the electrical command and the
separation of the main contacts. The operating times of circuit breakers, independent of
the breaking system and the type of operating mechanism, changes in dependence on
certain service parameters:
With reduced control voltage at the operating coil there is less energy available to
change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating
time extends itself. (Valid for all types of operating drives.)
By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry
out the switching movement changes.
The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical
resistance of the operating coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas
are all dependent on the temperature. Moreover, there is expansion of operating
rods and porcelains. All these parameters influence the operating time in different
ways.
In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some
milliseconds. The RPH2 is in the position to compensate these operating time variations.
3.1.3. RPH2 structure

The outstanding features of the RPH2 are:
Microprocessor control with a switching command time resolution of 0,1 ms.
Large graphic display to show the adjusted and measured values ( in German,
English and French or user defined language)
Easy setting via keypad or PC interface.
Analogue module for measuring control voltage, pressure and temperature, for the
compensation of changes in operating time.
Page 17
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Current measuring function for the graphic display of the line currents during
switching.
Extensive alarm functions
Two switching functions (CLOSING and OPENING) with one device are possible.
Switching programs with fixed switching times for the most frequent applications.
A free program is available for special user-defined applications (e.g. switching
unloaded lines).
Extensive archive function. The most important data for the last 1000 operations are
stored in a non-volatile memory and are available for diagnostic purposes.
Comfortable PC software for setting and read-out archive data. All data can be
stored and printed out. If the user cannot find sufficiency with the three languages
mentioned previously, then the display can be translated into the user's national
language using PC software.
Compact housing for flush mounting or wall mounting.
3.1.4. Function of the RPH2

The phase-synchronous trigger-signal is taken from the network voltage (phase L1). The
trigger-signal is based on the voltage-zeros of the reference voltage.
The network voltage is also used as a reference for circuit opening. The amount of
phase shift between current and voltage is almost always +90el. or -90el. (A deviation
of 1el. creates a variation of 0,06 ms of the switching point.)
The controller's mode of operation shown below. The diagrams are only single-phased
and shown without transient effects which may possibly occur.
3.1.4.1. Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum (Fig. 1)
At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next
voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given
operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that current starts
at the required time (3). Through the unavoidable pre-arcing in the circuit breaker pole
the current begins before actually touching the contacts. Contact touching happens at
the pre-arcing time after the voltage maximum (optimum switching time). The required
pre-arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all three phases. The two other phases
are controlled in the same (independent) manner.
Page 18
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Figure 1
2
System
voltage
3
Current
t arc
CB-ON
command
t d
to RPH2
CB operating time
Command
by RPH2
4
CB main
contact
t_arc...pre-arcing time of CB
t_d... delay time of RPH2
time
3.1.4.2. Breaking of an inductive current

At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next
voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given
operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that contact
separation occurs at the required time (3). In the time between contact separation and
the following current zero crossing, the contacts have separated so far that after the
current breaking in the zero crossing (4),an adequate contact gap exists to withstand the
transient recovery voltage. The required arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all
three phases. The two other phases are controlled in the same (independent) manner.
Figure 2
2
System
voltage
3
4
Current
t_arc
CB-OFF
command
to RPH2
t_d
CB operating time
Command
by RPH2
CB main
contact
t_arc...arcing time of CB
time
t_d ...delay time of RPH2
Page 19
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Whether the system neutral is grounded or isolated, the RPH2 registers the signal
contacts of the neutral earthingswitch and automatically selects the correct switching
time.
3.1.4.3. Switching program
The RPH2 already has several preconfigured switching programs for various uses.
The treatment of the system neutral of the network is automatically taken into
consideration.
The trigger point for the switching times is the beginning of the period that is
determinated by the zero crossing of the voltage L1-N (reference voltage). The given
delay times in table 1 are given in milliseconds after the trigger point. They show the
moment where current flow begins or ends (point (4) in figures 1 and 2). The RPH2
automatically takes pre-arcing and breaking times into account.
The following programs are available:
Transformer (transformer, transformer bank, three-core reactor)
Reactor (reactor group)
Capacitor bank
Free program
The following table is based on a phase sequence of the network of
L1= reference
L2= reference - 120
L3= reference - 240
Table 1: Delay times of the various switching programs.
Switching programs
Transformer
Neutral
GROUNDED
ISOLATED
Reactor
GROUNDED
ISOLATED
Capacitor
GROUNDED
ISOLATED
Operation
CLOSING
OPENING
CLOSING
OPENING
CLOSING
OPENING
CLOSING
OPENING
CLOSING
OPENING
CLOSING
OPENING
L1
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
5 (4.2)
0
5 (4.2)
10 (8.3)
5 (4.2)
Delay time
L2
10 (8.3)
1.7 (1.4)
0
10 (8.3)
1.7 (1.4)
1.7 (1.4)
0
10 (8.3)
6.7 (5.6)
1.7 (1.4)
5 (4.2)
10 (8.3)
L3
10 (8.3)
8.3 (6.9)
0
10 (8.3)
8.3 (6.9)
8.3 (6.9)
0
10 (8.3)
3.3 (2.8)
8.3 (6.9)
5 (4.2)
10 (8.3)
Values in () for 60 Hz.

The free program enables the user to select whatever switching time for both switching
functions (if available) and for both types of neutral treatment.
3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors

For this switching task select the program "Transformer" in the menu [System Data]
[Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.
For transformers with primary windings in delta connection the program for isolated
neutral must be used (short circuit the terminals -X6:8 with -X8:11 of the RPH2).
Page 20
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.2.1. Closing
3.2.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral
Circuit breaker closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient
processes. With earthed-neutral networks the obvious thing to do would be to switch
offset the three phases L1, L2 and L3 in their respective voltage peak, i.e. timewise each
one about a third of the period. Due to the mutual coupling of the individual phases (via
the iron core in three-core transformers or via the low-voltage winding in transformer
banks) this switching sequence did not have the desired effect. The first phase L1 is
closed in the voltage peak (a quarter period after the voltage zero crossing of the
reference voltage L1-N). Because the first phase is laid to nominal voltage, the flux in the
relevant core rises also to its nominal value. This flux closes via both the remaining, nongenerated cores, to each a half. If closing of the two remaining phases occurs a quarter
period after the first, current flow can start immediately and without transient process
(switching sequence L1-L2+L3).
3.2.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral
With an isolated neutral, closing of one phase makes no sense. Two phases must be
closed first (L2 and L3) and the obvious thing to do would be to select for the switching
time the voltage peak of the phase to phase voltage (i.e. zero crossing of the reference
voltage L1-N). Switching on the third phase occurs about a quarter period later, at the
peak of voltage L1 (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).
3.2.2. Opening
For switching off transformers and three leg reactors with the RPH2, please read point
3.3.2 "Switching off Reactor Groups".

The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:
The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles
(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about 0,1 ms.
3.2.3.1. Closing
For closing at the correct time, the pre-arcing time of the breaker at the closing voltage
(see table 2) according to the phases and the treatment of the system neutral.
Table 2: Closing Voltage (Un= system voltage (rms.))
Phase
Neutral Grounded Neutral Isolated
L1
(2/3)*Un
1.5*(2/3)*Un
L2
*2*Un
*2*Un
L3
*2*Un
*2*Un
If the exact value cannot be obtained from the breaker manufacturer, the optimum
closing time can be determined through switching tests with oscillographical
measurements of the inrush currents. For RPH2 with option I, the inrush currents are
directly shown by the device (curve course and peak value). For the tests it is advisable
Page 21
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
to begin with an assumed pre-arcing time of 3 ms at (2/3)*Un, 2.5 ms at *2*Un and

4.5 ms at 1.5*(2/3)*Un.
3.2.3.2. Opening
Data of the optimum arcing time in order to guarantee a sure current breaking in the next
zero crossing.
See 3.3.3 for further information

With regard to the accuracy of the switching time, closing in the voltage peak is not so
critical. By closing at 1 ms before or after the peak, the voltage still amounts to 95 % of
the peak value, at 2 ms at least 81 % (valid for 50 Hz).
Therefore an accuracy of 2 ms at 50 Hz or 60 Hz is sufficient.
See 3.3.4 for opening values
3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups

For this switching task select the program "Reactor" in the menu [System Data]
If the RPH2 is only to be used for opening, then this program can also be used to
switch three core reactors (switching moments are identical to the transformer
program).
3.3.1. Closing
Closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient processes. With
grounded neutral networks the three phases L1, L2 and L3 are closed in their respective
voltage peak, i.e. timewise each one offset about a third of the period, as there is no
coupling between the phases (switching sequence L2-L1-L3).
Closing runs according to the same principles as in the program for transformers (see
3.2.1.2).
3.3.2. Opening
Breaking of small inductive currents, as is with reactors, can lead to high switching
surges if current chopping or restriking in the circuit breaker occurs.
Contact separation should take place a sufficient time before current zero crossing so
that after current breaking the contact gap is great enough to withstand the recovery
voltage. The switching times given in table 1, indicate the moment of current breaking.
The necessary arcing window is taken into account by the RPH2 through the arcing
time.

Page 22
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles
(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about 0,1 ms.
3.3.3.1. Closing
The pre-arcing times of the circuit breaker must be known.
Pre-arcing time of the breaker in the voltage peak: equal value for all three phases
with grounded neutral or for phase L1 with isolated neutral.
Pre-arcing time with partial voltage: for phases L2 and L3 with isolated neutral (see
table 2)
3.3.3.2. Opening
The optimum arcing time input determines the arcing window for a secure current
breaking, free from restrikes, in the next zero crossing. The value is given by the breaker
manufacturer.
In order not to come into conflict with unavoidable operating time tolerances, contact
separation should begin 1,5 ms after zero crossing at the earliest, i.e. do not select an
arcing time of longer than 8,5 ms (6,8 ms at 60 Hz). About a quarter period as arcing
time is regarded as standard time.

For circuit breaker closing, point 3.2.4 applies (standard value 2 ms).
For circuit breaker opening, the breaker should achieve an operating time accuracy
of 1,5 ms.
3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors

For this switching task select the program "Capacitor" in the menu [System Data]
3.4.1. Closing
High inrush currents and high voltage surges can occur with the random switching of
capacitors, especially if switching takes place in the voltage peak. The effects of parallel
switching of capacitors is particularly serious. Particularly high voltage surges can occur,
due to reflections at the end of radial networks.
Closing takes place in the voltage zero crossing of the related phase-to earth voltage,
i.e. all phases offset one third of the period (switching sequence L1-L3-L2).
As a unipolar switching makes no sense, two phases are simultaneously closed in the
voltage zero crossing of their phase to phase voltage. The third phase follows a quarter
period later (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).
Page 23
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.4.2. Opening
In general, breaking of capacitive currents represents no problem for modern circuit
breakers. If the RPH2 is used for the synchronized switching of capacitor banks, then
the same applies as in 3.3.2, i.e. contact separation in sufficient time before voltage zero
crossing.

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three poles (see 3.1.2 for
definition). Accuracy about 0,1 ms.
In order to achieve the necessary accuracy when closing in the voltage zero crossing,
the rate of fall of the withstand voltage (dUd/dt) of the breaker should be greater than the
rate of change of the gap voltage at voltage zero (dU/dt). Figure 3 shows three possible
cases.
The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is less than the rate of
fall of the system voltage (dU/dt).
dUd/dt < dU/dt, k<1.
The breaker can be used for this application if dUd/dt > 0.8*dU/dt. In this case
please contact the manufacturer of the breaker for calculation of the pre-arcing
times.
The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is equal to the rate of fall
of the system voltage (dU/dt).
dUd/dt = dU/dt, k=1.
The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is greater than the rate
of fall of the system voltage (dU/dt).
dUd/dt > dU/dt, k>1.
Figure 3
t
1 interrupter dielectric strength lower than dU/dt of system voltage
2 interrupter dielectric strength equal dU/dt of system voltage
3 interrupter dielectric strength greater than dU/dt of system voltage
Page 24
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
However, some pre-arcing may be inevitable due to variations in the closing time and
the spread in dielectric withstand. To minimise energizing transients, the closing should
aim at an instant, td, after the voltage zero (the RPH2 takes this into account through a
given arcing time). If data is not available from the breaker manufacturer, the pre-arcing
time can be approximated. Modern breakers have closing contact speeds of typical 5
m/s and a dielectric strength of more than 20 kV/mm. That results in a fall rate (dUd/dt)
of more than 100 kV/ms.
Figure 4 shows the voltage across the open contact gap and the withstand voltage fall
with varying closing times. The arcing time ta is calculated so that the withstand
voltage is approx. the same value as the upper and lower operating time tolerance.
Figure 4
Ud
u
Up
ta
T
T1
voltage across the open contact gap and withstand voltage
fall with varying closing time T 1T
The RPH2 arcing time setting can be calculated according to the following formulas.
Take note of the differing arcing times with isolated neutrals. The calculations must be
verified by switching tests.
Page 25
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Note: The system voltage in the following formulas is related to one interrupting
chamber of the circuit breaker, take care in case of breakers with multiple interrupting
chambers!
The voltage across one interrupting chamber is calculated as follows where "m" is the
number of interrupting chambers of one pole:
1.05 m-1
Un = U system
m
Un [kV]
Un... Voltage for one interrupting chamber
system voltage (rms) for one interrupting chamber
2
[kV]
3
2
u'= Un
[kV]
2
u'= Un
peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles

peak value, neutral isolated, for the two
first poles L2 and L3
u'=1.5 Un
2
[kV]
3
peak value, neutral isolated, for the last

pole L1
dU
1
[kV/ ms]
= u'
dt
1000
dUd
[kV/ ms]
dt
dUd

dt
= k [p.u.]
dU

dt
T [ms]
T
)
sin(
1000 1000 [ms]
ta =
k
T
) u [kV]
Up = sin(
1000
rateof fall of system voltage

rate of fall of CB withstand voltage
see figure 3
variation of CB closing time

prearcing time set to RPH2
prearcing voltage
The following example demonstrates the calculation for the pre-arcing time for each
pole with various system neutral treatments.
Page 26
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Example:
Un = 145 [kV]
u' = 118.4 [kV]
u' = 102.5 [kV]
system voltage (rms)

peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles
peak value, neutral isolated, for the two
first poles L2 and L3
u' = 177.6 [kV]

dU
= 37.2 [kV / ms]
dt
dU
= 32.2 [kV / ms]
dt
peak value, neutral isolated, for the last pole L1

rate of fall of system voltage, neutral grounded
rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated
(for the two first poles L2 and L3)
dU
= 558
. [kV / ms]
dt
rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated

(for the last pole L1)
dUd
= 100 [kV / ms]
dt
k = 2.7 [p. u.]
k = 3.1 [p. u.]
k = 1.8 [p. u.]
T = 1 [ms]
ta = 0.4 [ms]
ta = 0.3 [ms]
ta = 0.5 [ms]
rate of fall of CB withstand voltage

neutral grounded, for L1, L2, L3
neutral isolated, for L2, L3
neutral isolated, for L1
variation of CB closing time
neutral grounded, prearcing time set to RPH2
for all poles
neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2
for poles L2 and L3
neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2
for pole L1
3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

Capacitor energizing places the greatest demands on the breaker in reference to
operating time constancy. Every variation from the required switching time leads to a
higher withstand voltage value which causes greater surges and inrush currents.
Closing time variation should amount to 1 ms at the most. When this accuracy cannot
be maintained under all conditions, we recommend the use of the analogue module
option A to correct the operating time influences.
For closing, the switch should reach a operating time accuracy of 1,5 ms.
Page 27
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
3.5
Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines

Uncharged high voltage lines are to be fundamentally treated like capacitors. Due to
the inter-phase coupling the switching moments are not the same as for capacitor
banks. The RPH2 can also be used for auto-reclosing of uncompensated lines
equipped with inductive potential transformers. During the auto-reclose dead-time the
trapped charges on the line must be fully discharged by the inductive potential
transformers!
Whether the system neutral is earthed or isolated does not effect the switching
moments.
The RPH2 must be set to the [User Program] with the following settings (see also
5.1.5.1).
For [T_C1 Neutral isolated] and for [T_C1 Neutral grounded] the same values must be
set:
50 Hz:
L1 =
0 ms
L2 = 7.3 ms
L3 = 13.3 ms
60 Hz:
L1 =
0 ms
L2 = 6.1 ms
L3 = 11.1 ms
Page 28
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES
4.1
Signal Module: Option S
4.1.1 Alarm outputs

The module offers additional outlets (alarm 2 to 7). Each alarm contact corresponds
with the associated indicator-LED (LED 2 to 7) at the front. The allocation of the alarm
functions to the output contacts is user-defined. Many alarm functions can be laid to
one output. The procedure is described in chapter 5.
4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs

Opto coupler inputs with pre-defined functions are available.
4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time
Three inputs serve to measure the operating time of the three poles via their auxiliary
contacts. (Resolution 0,5 ms). The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts signalling (contact
52a) works with an internal RPH2 voltage (48 VDC), i.e. potential-free contacts are
necessary. The necessary wiring is to be carried out according to the accompanying
wiring diagram.
Figure 5
CB main
contact
closing
CB aux.
contact
-t
CB main
contact
opening
CB aux.
contact
t
time
To compensate the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts of
the breaker poles, the possibility exists to feed in a compensation time in order to
maintain the operating time as real value on the display and in the archives. Figure 5
shows the correlation as an example. If the auxiliary contact closes after the main
contact then the compensation time value. t is negative, if the auxiliary contact opens
before the main contact then a positive value results. If no possibility exists to measure
the time shift of the auxiliary contacts, this value can also be determined via the RPH2
within the time release limits.
Conditions:
The pole operating times given by the manufacturer are correctly fed in (see 5.1 and
5.2)
Page 29
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
The environmental conditions correspond approx. to the conditions when measuring

the pole operating times in the factory. With strong deviations in the environmental
conditions, the pole operating times must be measured again on site.
The RPH2 compensating function is deactivated (see 5.6).
The circuit breaker can be operated repeatedly without load (with opened busbar
disconnector.
Operate the circuit breaker via the RPH2 with channel 1.
Change to the menu [Measurement] / [Measured Times].
In the menu [Measured Op. Times] (Figure 6) the measured pole operating times
appear in the status line, including the main contact/auxiliary contact time shift.
Figure 6
Me a s u r
C o mm a
CB S i
Ca l c u
> Me a s u
146 . 5
d
n
g
l
r
1
L1
T i me s
OU T
a l Re c
t e d Op
d Op . T
5 . 6 14
12345
L2
L
d
n
a
e
4
Pole operating times:

e i v ed
. T i me s
i me
6 . 1ms
678
3
L1 = 139.3 ms
L2 = 138.7 ms
L3 = 139.6 ms
The value for "H-contact SK1 Diff" for every pole is calculated with:
[Aux. Timeshift CH1] = [Pole operating time] - [Measured Op. Time]

The input values in figure 7 are calculated with the values form figure 6 and .the values
of the pole operating times.
Figure 7
CB
A
A
> A
A
-
r
r
u
u
7
Da
c i
c i
x .
x .
. 2
t
n
n
T
T
a
g T
g T
i me
i me
- 6
L1
- >
i me CH 1
i me CH 2
s h i f t CH 1
s h i f t CH 2
. 9
- 6 . 5ms
12345678
L2
L3
Because the operating times are measured with a resolution of 0,5 ms, it is possibly
necessary to constitute the average value from several switching operations. Feed in
the determined values under [CB Data] / [Aux. Timeshift CH1] (figure 7) and check the
measured operating times as described above. A further compensation is possibly
necessary.
Page 30
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Check in all cases that the measured operating time corresponds with actual operating
times of the circuit breaker. This is essential for using the function of the adaptive
control !
For devices with two switching functions (RPH2-2), repeat the procedure for the
second switching channel too.
4.1.2.2 Remote reset
An input for remote reset is available. A potential-free contact (closer) is necessary as
control device. Drive takes place with the RPH2 intern 48 VDC voltage.
4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization
A further input is for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be parallel switched with
other synchronized control devices. A potential-free contact is necessary.
4.2
Analogue Module: Option A

With this module the influence of environmental parameters on the pole operating time
can be compensated. External sensors are necessary for pressure and temperature
measurement. Control voltage, pressure and temperature are continually measured.
The voltage and pressure values are immediately available for the calculation of
compensation times. The shown vales in the menus [Measured value/Control voltage]
and [Measured value/Pressure] are the basic calculating factors.
An average value formation is carried out for temperature compensation.
Update takes place every two hours. The stored temperature value is compared with
the measured value and the stored temperature is compensated by half the difference
(figure 8). In the menu [Measured value/Temperature] the actual measured
temperature is shown, in the menu [Measured value/Temperature f. Comp.] the
average is shown which is effective for compensation.
Figure 8
ambient temperature
temperature for compensation
Page 31
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
In the menu [Measured value/Compensation] each of the actual additional times are
shown. After the key-operated switch is turned form "OFF" to "OPERATION", the RPH2
carries out an automatic check and all analogue measured values for compensation
are set at the actual measured value.
4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation

Measuring the control voltage is done internally in the RPH2 and no additional
equipment is necessary. The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time
compensation according to a function with an open parameter. By fixing these
parameters the compensation function can be suited to the character of the power
switch. Calculation for opening and closing takes place separately. The parameter kU1
works for switching channel 1, kU2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2
switching functions). If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no additional times
are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked. Fixing the
compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the assistance of the
accompanying PC Software.
Two breaker characteristic measured points are required to calculate the compensation
function:
One point with nominal conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one
pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the
manufacturer value for pole operating time.
A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of
the same pole with rated pressure, rated temperature and reduced control voltage.
Figure 9 shows an example of a circuit breaker opening:
Value 1 (with nominal conditions):
U1
=
220 VDC
t1
=
27.0 ms
Value 2:
U2
=
180 VDC
t2
=
29.2 ms
Rated control voltage

Pole operating time with nominal conditions
Reduced control voltage
Pole operating time with control voltage U2
Figure 9
32
Function calculated by RPH2
31
Operating Time [ms]
30
Value 2
(U2/t2)
29
28
27
Value 1
(U1/t1)
26
140
160
180
200
Operating Voltage [V]
Page 32
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
220
240
The compensation parameter kU can be calculated using the following formula:
Value 1:
U1 [V] rated control voltage
t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions
Value 2:
U2 [V] reduced control voltage
t2 [ms] CB operating time with U2
kU =
(t2 - t1) 100

drive mechanism parameter
U1
( 1) t1
U2
The input from above results in a compensation parameter kU = 36.6

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kU1 and kU2 is to be
carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.
4.2.2 Temperature Compensation

An external sensor with integrated transducer (2 conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC)
and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) is necessary for measuring the temperature.
The transducer supply is effected through the RPH2. Up to eight RPH2's can be
parallel switched to one temperature transducer. See the connection plan 58.010.111xx also.
The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according to
a piecewise linear function with one control point every 10 C in the range of -50 C
and +50 C. So all kinds of temperature functions of the circuit breaker (from linear to
exponential) can be set to the RPH2. The measured values can be entered in the table
in figure 10. The line Delta_t = 0 ms defines the nominal operating time of the circuit
breaker under normal conditions. The values of Delta_t at different ambient
temperatures are the differences of the measured operating times to the nominal
operating time. The 11 values of Delta_t(T) (T = -50 C to +50 C) must be set to the
RPH2.
In the example in figure 11 the procedure is shown. The measured values are marked
by squares. Connect the points by lines end eventually extend the lines to the extremes
(dotted line in the example). Evaluate the values of Delta_t(T) at the control points (50 C to +50 C) so to get the 11 values for Delta_t(T) shown in the table in figure 11.
By using the PC software "RPH2- Tool" also an exponential function with one open
parameter can be calculated. Especially for circuit breakers with spring drive
mechanism this option will be useful.
Page 33
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Figure 10
Delta_t [ms]
Ambint Temperature [C]
Page 34
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Figure 11
Delta_t [ms]
Temperature
-50 C
-40 C
-30 C
-20 C
-10 C
0 C
+10 C
+20 C
+30 C
+40 C
+50 C
Delta_t
13.0 ms
9.0 ms
5.0 ms
2.5 ms
1.6 ms
0.8 ms
0.4 ms
0.0 ms
-0.2 ms
-0.4 ms
-1.0 ms
measured values
Ambient Temperature [C]
With RPH2's with two switching functions, the evaluation of Delta_t(T) has to be carried
out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.
4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation

There are two module models available for measuring pressure:
Option A1: for breakers with a mutual hydraulic system for all three poles
Option A3: for breakers with separate hydraulic systems for each pole
One (Option A1) or three (Option A3) external sensors with integrated transducer (2
conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) are
necessary for measuring hydraulic pressure. The transducer supply is effected through
the RPH2.
Page 35
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according to
a function with one open parameter. By fixing this parameter, the compensation
function can be suited to the character of the circuit breaker. Calculation for opening
and closing takes place separately. The parameter kP1 works for switching channel 1,
kP2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2 switching functions). For the model
with option A3 with pressure measuring per pole only a compensation parameter for
each of the three poles is fed in. If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no
additional times are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked.
Fixing the compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the
assistance of the accompanying PC Software.
Two measuring points of the switching characteristic analogue for 4.2.1 are required to
calculate the equalising curve:
One point with rated conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one
pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the
manufacturer value for pole operating time.
A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of
the same pole with rated control voltage, rated temperature and reduced hydraulic
pressure.
Example:
Value 1 (with nominal conditions):
P1
=
265 bar
t1
=
110.5 ms
Value 2:
P2
=
200 bar
t2
=
127.7 ms
Rated pressure
Pole operating time with nominal conditions
Reduced pressure
Pole operating time with pressure P2
The compensation parameters kP can be calculated using the following formula.
Value 1:
P1 [V] rated hydraulic pressure
t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions
Value 2:
P2 [V] reduced hydraulic pressure
t2 [ms] CB operating time with P2
kP =
(t2 - t1) 100

drive mechanism parameter
P1
( 1) t1
P2
The input from above results in a compensation parameter kP = 47.9.

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kP1 and kP2 is to be
carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.
Page 36
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors

For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer
are necessary which are not part of the delivery.
The integrated transducers must meet the following requirements:
Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC (supplied by the RPH2)
2 conductor system
Output signal 4 mA to 20 mA
Such transducers can be obtained from many manufacturers. The measuring range of
the sensors adjust itself to the respective requirements.
However, unnecessarily large measuring ranges reduce the measuring accuracy of the
RPH2. The RPH2 measuring input is adapted to the measuring range of the sensor
through parameterisation.
Transducer installation is carried out according to the manufacturer's guidelines.
Likewise, the connection cables to the RPH2 must be selected according to the
manufacturer's information. If no information is available, we recommend a shielded
two-wire cable per transducer, or at least a twisted pair of wires.

RPH2 with analogue module A and signal module S provide the additional feature of an
adaptive control to compensate the long time drift in operating time of the CB drive. The
actual operating times of the poles are measured by the signal module. A weighting
factor in the range of 0 to 0.5, step 0.05 (0 = function is disabled) is used for controlling
this function. A fraction (depending on the weighting factor) of the time difference
between the operating time of the last operation and the operation before is added to the
actual operating time. Additional operating times due to compensation functions are not
taken into consideration, so the pure long time drift of the drive mechanism is
compensated. The additional adaptive times are displayed and a function is available to
reset these times.
The compensation of the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts
of the breaker poles must be done very exactly to avoid errors in measuring of the actual
operating times.
Time deviations of the measured values greater than 10 ms are not considered. (no
operation of the CB or incorrect measurement of operating times).
Additional adaptive time is limited to 1 ms from one operation to the next.
If the operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away from the pre-set
operating times for more than
5 ms for opening
10 ms for closing
the alarm "Drive mech. Failure" is generated.
The value of the weighting factor depends on the type of drive mechanism. We propose
a value of 0.25 to 0.30 for all types of mechanism.
Page 37
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
4.3
Current Module Option I

A current measuring module is available to make the switching of large transformers
and reactors easy when putting the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller into operation.
With this the inrush current can be recorded and graphically displayed during the
switching process. Data for the last 4 switching operations are stored in a non-volatile
memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are shown after feeding in
the current transformer current ratio.
For every phase there is an input for each 1 A and 5 A available. Because the current
inputs have a short time withstand of 100 xln, current measurement can be carried out
over a measuring core as well as a protection core of the current transformer.
Page 38
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM
5.1
System data
>
- - RPH2 - 2 S I A 3
S y s t em Da t a
CB Da t a
Ana l o g Da t a
A l a r ms
L1
L2
Enter
- -
12345678
L3
Esc
5.1.1 Password
The factory-setting of the-password is "0000". To activate the password you must
change to the submenu [System Data/Password]. The actual status (active or off) is
shown in the bottom-left corner of the display. Type in the correct password and confirm
the assumption by pressing the Enter-button (see chapter 2.5). The display shows
active and the green LED ready starts blinking if the password is correct (see chapter
2.4.3.1).
The password will be deactivated automatically if no button is pressed for more than 90
seconds.
>
Sy s
Pa
Sy
Co
Ra
L1
t
s
s
n
t
em Da t
swo r d
t em F r
t r o l V
ed P r e
eque
o l t a
s s u r
00
12345
L2
L
n
g
e
0
6
3
c y
e
0
78
5.1.2 System Frequency

After activating this function by pressing the Enter-button you can choose any item of
the list by pressing the +- or the --button (see chapter 2.5).
Available items: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz
Page 39
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
S y s t em Da t
Pa s swo r d
> S y s t em F r
Con t r o l V
Ra t ed P r e
50 Hz
1
L1
L2
a
equen c y
o l t age
s s u r e
2345678
L3

Type in the rated voltage of your CB-coil (available only for modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2xxA1, RPH2-xxA3).
This value acts as base for the calculation of the additional compensation value of the
mechanical operating time of the CB.
Sy s
Pa
Sy
> Co
Ra
t
s
s
n
t
em Da t
swo r d
t em F r
t r o l V
ed P r e
eque
o l t a
s s u r
23
12345
L2
L
L1
n
g
e
0
6
3
c y
e
, 0
78
5.1.4 Rated Pressure

Type in the value of the rated pressure of the hydraulic system of your CB-drive
(available only for module RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3). This value acts as base for the
calculation of the compensation value of the operating time of the CB.
Sy s t
Sy s
Con
> Ra t
Sw i
em Da t
t em F r
t r o l V
ed P r e
t c h i ng
L1
a
eque
o l t a
s s u r
P r o
n
g
e
g
1
123456
L2
L3
c y
e
r am
0ba r
78
5.1.5 Switching Program

Select the suitable switching program by pressing the +- or --button:
transformer
shunt reactor
capacitor bank
user program
Page 40
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Sy s t
Con
Ra t
> Sw i
Lan
T r an
L1
em Da t
t r o l V
ed P r e
t c h i ng
guage
s f o r me
1
L2
a
o l t age
s s u r e
P r o g r am
r
2345678
L3
5.1.5.1 User Program

You can define your own switching moments for each phase by selecting the User
Program.
Note: If you select user program you have to select the rated frequency first (see
chapter 5.2).
Adjustable switching moments:
T_C1 Neutral isolated:
Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with isolated
neutral.
>
Us
T
T
T
T
e r P r o g r am
_C1 Ne u t r . i
_C1 Ne u t r . g
_C2 Ne u t r . i
_C2 Ne u t r . g
0 , 0
0 , 0
1234
L1
L2
s
r
s
r
o
o
o
o
0
56
L3
l
u
l
u
,
7
a t e
nde
a t e
nde
0ms
8
d
d
d
d
T_C1 Neutral grounded:

Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with
grounded neutral.
The following two submenus are available only for module RPH2-2xx (module with two
switching channels):
T_C2 Neutral isolated:

Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with isolated
neutral.
T_C2 Neutral grounded:
Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with
grounded neutral.
Page 41
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.1.6 Function Channel 1

For the module RPH2-1xxx you have to select whether if you use the RPH2 for closing
or opening of the CB.
5.1.7 Language
Select your preferred language.
Available languages:
German
English
French
User language
S y s t em Da
Ra t ed P r
Sw i t c h i n
> Language
T i me / Da t
Eng l i s h
L1
t a
e s s u r e
g P r o g r am
e
12345678
L2
L3
Note: You can load the menutext in any language with the RPH-Tool (PC-based
software). If there any problems with the loaded language file you can return to the
English menus: Turn the key-operated switch to "OFF", press the "Quitt" button and
meanwhile return the key-operated switch back to "OPERATION".
5.1.8 Time / Date

Type in the actual date and time. The format for date and time is:
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM.
S y s t em Da t a
Sw i t c h i n g
Language
> T i me / Da t e
New Pa s swo
1996 - 12 - 06
12
L1
L2
P r o g r am
r d
17 : 51
345678
L3
Note: Type in only correct values for date and time.

Note: There are no problems with a date after 2000-01-01.
5.1.9 New Password

If you want to change the actual password simply type in the new password.
Possible values are all numbers between 0000 and 9999.
Page 42
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
S y s t em Da t a
Language
T i me / Da t e
> New Pa s swo r d
Se l f t e s t S t a
0
1234
L1
L2
r
0
5
L
t
00
678
3
Note: If you have forgotten the selected password, you can ask for a temporary
password (call your local ALSTOM Grid representative)
5.1.10 Selftest Start

You can activate the selftest-facility by pressing the Enter-button.
The selftest-facility checks the internal function of the module and the switching outputs.
S y s t em Da t a
T i me / Da t e
New Pa s swo
> Se l f t e s t S
Se l f t e s t
I
YES
12
L1
L2
r d
t a r t
n t e r v a l
345678
L3
Note: You can activate the selftest with the key-operated-switch too (see chapter 2.4.2).
5.1.11 Selftest Interval

Type in the desired interval between the automatic selftests.
The possible range is from 0,0 hours (shortest interval is 0,1 hour = 6 minutes) to 500
hours. Choosing a value of 0,0 hours deactivates the automatic selftest-facility.
S y s t em Da t a
T i me / Da t e
New Pa s swo r d
Se l f t e s t S t a r
> Se l f t e s t
I n t e
2
12345
L1
L2
L
t
r v a l
4 , 0 Hr
678
3
In the menu [Aux. Functions][Error Type] the type errors are displayed (see 5.6.3).
Page 43
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.2
CB Data

Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a
temperature of 20 C for switching channel 1.
The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms.
The switching function (closing or opening) for module RPH2-1xx depends on the
selection made in the submenu Function Channel 1. (see chapter 5.1.6).
Module RPH2-2xx uses channel 1 for closing of the CB.
>
CB D a
Op e r
Op e r
A r c i
A r c i
0 , 0
L1
t
a
a
n
n
a
t i n g T i me CH 1
t i n g T i me CH 2
g T i me CH 1
g T i me CH 2
0 , 0
0 , 0ms
12345678
L2
L3
Note 1: The value of the operating time for each phase of the CB depends on the type
and manufacturer of the CB. This value is part of the CB-documentation delivered with
your CB.
Note 2: The difference between 2 phases should be less than one period (20 ms for
50 Hz).
Note 3: For single-phase-CBs the values for all three phases must be the same.

Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a
temperature of 20 C for switching channel 2. Channel 2 always is used for opening.
This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx.

Type in the arcing time for each phase of the CB (see chapter 3.2 to 3.4).
Closing: Pre-arcing time of the CB. The closing of the main-contact happens after the
chosen switching moment.
Page 44
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Opening: Arcing time of the CB. The opening of the main-contact happens before the
zero-crossing of the current.
CB D a
Op e r
Op e r
> A r c i
A r c i
0 , 0
t
a
a
n
n
L1
a
t i n g T i me CH 1
t i n g T i me CH 2
g T i me CH 1
g T i me CH 2
0 , 0
0 , 0ms
12345678
L2
L3

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except
that channel 2 always is used for opening.

This value is used for compensating the time lag between the main-contact and the
auxiliary-contact of the CB (see chapter 4.1.2.1).
The permissible range is from -25,5 ms to +25,5 ms.
CB
A
A
> A
A
+
r
r
u
u
0
Da
c i
c i
x .
x .
, 0
t
n
n
T
T
L1
a
g T
g T
i me
i me
+0
i me CH 1
i me CH 2
s h i f t CH 1
s h i f t CH 2
, 0
+ 0 , 0ms
12345678
L2
L3
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxS.

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except
that channel 2 always is used for opening.

This menu opens a submenu for controlling the this function (see also 4.2.5)
CB D a
Au x .
> Adap
Comp
kU1
L1
t
T
t
e
V
a
i me s h
i v Co
n s a t i
o l t ag
L2
i f t CH 2
n t r o l
- >
on
e CH 1
12345678
L3
Page 45
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
This submenu and the following menus are available only with module RPH2-xSAx.
5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor
This factor defines the friction of time difference added to the operating time.
>
A d
W
A
A
R
a
e
d
d
e
p
i
a
a
s
t
g
p
p
e
i
h
t
t
t
v Co
t i ng
i ve
i ve
Ada
L 1
n t r o
Fa c
T i me
T i me
p t i v
0
12345
L2
L
l
t o r
s CH 1
s CH 2
e T i me
. 25
678
3
The permissible range is from 0.00 to 0.50 (step 0.05).

A value of 0.00 disables this function.
Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 1 are displayed.
Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 2 are displayed.
5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times
This function allows to reset the additional times due to adaptive control to zero. After
this, the RPH2 operates with the pre-set pole operating times.
5.2.8 Compensation
If you select NO all compensation functions are blocked.
If you select YES compensation is active (for description see chapter 4.2)
CB D a
Au x .
Au x .
> Comp
kU1
YES
t
T
T
e
V
a
i me
i me
n s a
o l t
L1
L2
s
s
t
a
h
h
i
g
i f t CH 1
i f t CH 2
on
e CH 1
12345678
L3

Type in the calculated value for compensation of changes of the control voltage (see
chapter 4.2.1).
The permissible range is from 0,0 to 150,0.
Page 46
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
CB D a
Au x .
Comp
> kU1
kP1
t
T
e
V
P
a
i me
n s a
o l t
r e s
i f t CH 2
on
e CH 1
r e CH 1
30 , 3
12345678
L2
L3
L1
s
t
a
s
h
i
g
u
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

same as 5.2.9, but for pressure compensation for channel 1.
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

This submenu enables or disables the temperature compensation.
CB D a t a
k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1
k P 1 P r e s u r e CH 1
> T emp . C omp . CH 1
T a b l e T emp . CH 1
ON
12345678
L1
L2
L3
- >

This menu opens a submenu for setting the values for temperature compensation.
Here the 11 values of Delta_t(T) for defining the temperature compensation function can
be entered to the RPH2 (see also 4.2.2).
Tab
De
> De
De
De
L1
l
l
l
l
l
e
t
t
t
t
a
a
a
a
T
_
_
_
_
emp
t
t
t
t
.
-
CH 1
50 C
40 C
30 C
20 C
+5 . 3
12345678
L2
L3
- >
ms
The permissible range for Delta_t is from -10.0 ms to +25.0 ms.
Page 47
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

same as 5.2.9, but for control voltage compensation for channel 2.

same as 5.2.10, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.


same as 5.2.12.1, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.
5.3
Analogue Data
5.3.1 Thresholds
The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH 2 obtained.
Exceeding of limit-settings cause an alarm, if set (see chapter 5.4).
>
Ana l og Da t a
T r e s ho l ds
- >
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r i m
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l t age
L1
L2
12345678
L3
5.3.1.1 Current max.

Type in the allowed maximum value (peak-value) of the current during the switching
operation. If the current during a switching operation exceeds this limit an alarm is
generated.
The permissible range is from 0 A to 9999 A.
Page 48
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
>
T r e s h
Cu r r
Op .
Op .
T emp
o
e
V
V
e
l
n
o
o
r
L1
d
t
l
l
a
s
ma
t ag
t ag
t u r
x
e
e
e
( p
ma
m i
ma
50
123456
L2
L3
- >
ea k )
x
n
x
0
A
78
This submenu is only available for module RPH2-xxI.

Type in the upper limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control
voltage becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.
The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V.
T r e s h
Cu r r
> Con t
Con t
T emp
o
e
r
r
e
l
n
o
o
r
L1
d s
t ma x ( p
l Vo l t ag
l Vo l t ag
a t u r e ma
242
123456
L2
L3
- >
ea k )
e ma x
e m i n
x
, 0 V
78
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min.
Type in the lower limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control
voltage becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.
T r e s h
Cu r r
Op .
> Op .
T emp
L1
o
e
V
V
e
l
n
o
o
r
d
t
l
l
a
s
ma
t ag
t ag
t u r
x
e
e
e
( p
ma
m i
ma
200
123456
L2
L3
- >
ea k )
x
n
x
, 0 V
78

Type in the upper limit for the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of
the temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.
The permissible range is from -100 C to +100 C.
Page 49
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
T r e s h
Op .
Op .
> T emp
T emp
o
V
V
e
e
l
o
o
r
r
L1
d
l
l
a
a
s
t
t
t
t
a
a
u
u
g
g
r
r
e ma
e m i
e ma
e m i
+50 ,
123456
L2
L3
- >
x
n
x
n
0 C
78

5.3.1.5 Temperature min.
Type in the lower limit of the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of
the temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.
The permissible range is from -100 C to +100 C.
T r e s h
Op .
T emp
> T emp
P r e s
o
V
e
e
s
l
o
r
r
u
L1
d
l
a
a
r
s
t age m i
t u r e ma
t u r e m i
e ma x
- 50 .
123456
L2
L3
- >
n
x
n
0 C
78
This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

Type in the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the
temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.
The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.
T r
T
T
> P
P
e s h
emp
emp
r e s
r e s
o
e
e
s
s
l
r
r
u
u
L1
d
a
a
r
r
s
t u r e ma
t u r e m i
e ma x
e m i n
35
123456
L2
L3
- >
x
n
0ba r
78
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.7 Pressure min.
Type in the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the
temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.
The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.
Page 50
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
T r
T
T
P
> P
e s h
emp
emp
r e s
r e s
L1
o
e
e
s
s
l
r
r
u
u
d
a
a
r
r
s
t u r e ma
t u r e m i
e ma x
e m i n
18
123456
L2
L3
- >
x
n
0ba r
78
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.
5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim

Type in the rated primary current of your current transducer.
The permissible range is from 0 A to 5000 A.
Ana l og Da t a
T r e s ho l ds
> CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s
Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l
50
1234567
L1
L2
L3
- >
r i m
e c
t age
0 A
8
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.
5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec

Type in the rated secondary current of your current transducer.
Permissible values are 1 A and 5 A.
Ana l og Da t a
T r e s ho l ds
- >
CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r i m
> CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c
Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l t age
5 A
12345678
L1
L2
L3
This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

Note: The current transformer has to be connected to the correct terminal of the RPH2
(1 A or 5 A, see wiring diagram).
Page 51
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage

Type in the measured value of the actual control voltage. This input calibrates the
internal voltage measurement. This value acts as base for the calculation of
compensation of the switching moment.
Ana l og
CT Ra
CT Ra
> Ac t ua
T emp e
t
t
l
r
L1
Da t a
ed Cu r
ed Cu r
Con t r .
a t u r e
1
1234
L2
r . p r i m
r . s e c
Vo l t age
- >
12 , 2 V
5678
L3

Determine the correct value:
Measure the actual value of the control voltage on terminal -X6:10 and -X6:11 with an
calibrated voltmeter and type in this value.
Type in the determined value.
Note:This input calibrates the voltage measurement function. The correct input of this
value is absolutely necessary. You cannot calibrate the RPH2 with the PC-software
RPH-Tool.
In the Normal-Mode (Ready-LED is steady-light) the measured voltage is displayed.
After calibrating the voltage measurement check the correct function by monitoring the
display.
5.3.5 Temperature
The following submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,
RPH2-xxA3.
In this submenu the temperature transducer is calibrated.
Ana l og
CT Ra
Ac t ua
> T emp e
P r e s s
Da t a
t ed Cu r r . s e c
l Con t r . Vo l t age
r a t u r e
- >
u r e
- >
L1
L2
12345678
L3
Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.
Page 52
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
>
T emp e r a t u r e
V a l u e a t 4 mA
V a l u e a t 2 0 mA
L1
- >
- 40 , 0 C
12345678
L2
L3
Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 20 mA.
This information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.
T emp e r a t u r e
V a l u e a t 4 mA
> V a l u e a t 2 0 mA
L1
- >
+100 , 0 C
12345678
L2
L3
5.3.6 Pressure
These submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.
In the following submenus the pressure transducer can be calibrated.
Ana l og
CT Ra
Ac t ua
T emp e
> P r e s s
L1
Da t a
t ed Cu r r . s e c
l Con t r . Vo l t age
r a t u r e
- >
u r e
- >
12345678
L2
L3
Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.
>
P r e s s u r e
Va l ue a t
Va l ue a t
L1
- >
4 mA
2 0 mA
0ba r
12345678
L2
L3
Page 53
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 20 mA. This
information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.
P r e s s u r e
Va l ue a t
> Va l ue a t
500ba r
12345678
L2
L3
L1
5.4
- >
4 mA
2 0 mA
Alarms
5.4.1 Reset Obligatory

In this submenu you can select which alarm outputs (and the according LED on the front
panel of the RPH2) are to be acknowledged. Alarm-outputs which are marked as reset
obligatory are displayed on the front panel and activated (closed) until you press the
Quitt-button, regardless whether the alarm is still active or already gone.
Example:
>
A l a
Re
Lo
A l
rms
s e t ob l i ga t o r y
c k - ou t
a rm L i s t
L1
10100000
12345678
L2
L3
- >
In the example mentioned above the alarms 1 and 3 are marked with the function "Reset
obligatory" (must be acknowledged).
Reset Obligatory (Setting 1):
Alarm is active
->
Alarm is acknowledged
->
Alarm off
->
respectively:
Alarm is active
->
Alarm off
->
Alarm is acknowledged
->
LED is blinking, alarm-output active

LED has steady-light, alarm-output active
LED off, alarm-output not active
Alarm is not reset obligatory (Setting 0):

Alarm is active
->
LED has steady-light, alarm-output active
Alarm off
->
Page 54
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Note: With the function "reset obligatory" you can change an alarm-message from the
type pulse type to a steady alarm type (see 5.4.3).
5.4.2 Lock-Out
Here you can mark each of the 7 alarm outputs to produce a blocking of the device in case of
the corresponding alarm occurs.
That means:
No switching operation is possible, the green LED is dark and the contact "Device not ready"
(-X6:12/13) is closed.
Some actions or alarms cause a lock out in any case ,also without activating the responding
alarm (LED dark, contact -X6:12-13 is closed):
Keyswitch is "OFF"
Relay starting up
Reference voltage is missing
Frequency not in permitted range
Neutral earthing switch in intermediate position
Example:
A l a
Re
> Lo
A l
rms
s e t ob l i ga t o r y
c k - ou t
a rm L i s t
L1
00100000
12345678
L2
L3
- >
In the example mentioned above the activating of alarm 3 blocks the RPH2. No
operation is possible, until the "Quit" button is pressed. The output contact "Device not
ready" (-X6:12/13) is closed.
5.4.3 Alarm List

The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH2. Each internal
alarm (message) can be assigned to up to 7 alarm-outputs. The assignment is made
through the setting of a 1 at the corresponding display-unit.
Example:
A l a
F r
F r
> Cu
*Re
L1
rm
equ
equ
r r e
f . V
L
e
e
n
o
i
n
n
t
l
s t
c y m i
c y ma
ma x (
t age
0010
1234
L2
- >
n
x
p
F
0
5
L
e
a
1
6
3
a
i
0
7
k )
l u r e
0
8
Page 55
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
In the example mentioned above the alarm-message Current max. (peak) is assigned
to alarm-output 3 and alarm-output 6.
The asterisk (*) at the position Ref. Voltage Failure in the picture above indicates that
the fault Ref. Voltage Failure is pending, that means the reference voltage is missing.
Pulse-alarm:
If an alarm-message is a pulse, this alarm-message is active only for a period of 0,5
seconds. If this alarm-message is assigned to an alarm-output which is marked as reset
obligatory, the alarm-output remains active until this alarm is acknowledged.
Note: The assignment of an alarm-message to the alarm-output number 8 has no effect.
5.4.3.1 Lock-out
This is only a summary alarm. It is generated by other alarms which cause a blocking of the
relay. It is active when the device is blocked (see 5.4.2). The alarm itself causes no blocking
of the device!
5.4.3.2 Frequency min
The reference voltage (phase L1) is monitored permanently. If the lower limit of the
frequency is reached, an alarm-message Frequency min. is generated.
Limits:
Rated Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
16 2/3 Hz
Lower Limit
45 Hz
54 Hz
15 Hz
Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only if the reference voltage is
connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm Frequency min. is
generated.
5.4.3.3 Frequency max.
The reference voltage is monitored permanently on phase L1. If the upper limit of the
frequency is reached, an alarm-message Frequency max. is generated.
Limits:
Rated Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
16 2/3 Hz
Upper Limit
55 Hz
66 Hz
18,26 Hz
Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only, if the reference voltage is
connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm Frequency min. is
generated.
Page 56
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak)

This alarm-message is generated if the setting of the current maximum (peak value) is
reached or exceeded during a switching operation in one or more phases (thresholds
see 5.3.1.1)
The peak-value of the current is monitored, not the RMS-value.
This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).
This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxI.
5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure
This alarm-message is generated if the reference voltage is missing for more than
2 seconds.
Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm
is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).
5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure
This alarm-message is generated if the minute-pulse is missing.
5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate
This alarm-message is generated if the position of the Neutral-switch is not defined.
5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded
This message indicates, that the Neutral-switch is in position grounded. If the position
grounded is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set Neutral grounded.
Note: This message is not an alarm-message but may be helpful for supervising
5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated
This message indicates, that the Neutral-switch is in position isolated. If the position
isolated is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set Neutral isolated (see 5.4.3.8).
5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR
This alarm-message is generated when the automatic selftest discovers an internal error
(output circuit is not working correct).
This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 1.
Page 57
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 2.
This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx.
This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 1 (the function of
channel 1 is depending on configuration of the RPH2 and the Function Channel 1 chapter 5.1.6) is to short, i. e. perhaps not all three phase are switched within this time.
The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.
This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 2 (opening) is to
short.
The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.
This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx .
5.4.3.15 Operating Time min
This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2
ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is shorter).
This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.
5.4.3.16 Operating Time max.
This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2
ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is longer).
Page 58
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure

This alarm-message is generated when:
The monitoring of the CB-position is undefined.
The operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away for more than 5 ms
for opening and 10 ms for closing from the pre-set operating times (only with adaptive
control, see 4.2.5).
5.4.3.18 Archive Full
This alarm-message indicates that the archive is nearly full.
Note: The archive is capable to store 1000 switching operations. When the 900th
switching operation is stored in the archive the alarm-message is generated. Each
switching operation following generates an alarm-message until the archive is read by
the PC-Software RPH-Tool,
5.4.3.19 Archive Failure
This alarm-message is generated, when storing data into the archive fails.
5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min
This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the control voltage is reached (see
chapter 5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min.).
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,
RPH2-xxA3.
This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the control voltage is reached (see
chapter 5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max.).
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,
RPH2-xxA3.
5.4.3.22 Temperature min
This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the ambient temperature is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.5 Temperature min.).
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or
RPH2-xxA3.
Page 59
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the ambient temperature is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.4 Temperature max.).
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2xxA3.
5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault
This alarm-message indicates an error of the temperature transducer (cable or sensor),
i. e. the temperature measurement is not working.
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2xxA3.
5.4.3.25 Pressure min
This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.7 Pressure min.).
This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.
This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached
(see chapter 5.3.1.6 Pressure max.).
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.
5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault
This alarm-message indicates an error of the pressure transducer (cable or sensor), i. e.
the pressure measurement is not working.
This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.
5.5
Measurement
5.5.1 Current Graphs

In this submenu you can display the current curves of the last 4 switching operations for
each phase (L1, L2, L3), as well as the maximum currents (peak value).
>
Me a
Cu
Me
F r
Cu
YES
s
r
a
e
r
u
r
s
q
r
r
e
u
u
e
eme n t
n t Gr aph s
r e d T i me s
en c y
n t ( RMS )
L1
Page 60
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
L2
12345678
L3
- >
- >
Pressing the Enter-button activates the Graph-mode. Repeatedly pressing the Enterbutton allows to go through the last 4 switching operations. Pressing the +- or --button
changes from phase L1 to phase L2 to phase L3 to the peak values of the current of
each phase. When a graph is displayed, the amplification factor of the graph can be
changed. Pressing the [Quitt] and [+] button at the same time increases the
amplification, [Quitt] and [-] button decreases the amplification.
This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.
5.5.2 Measured Times

The measured times of the last switching operation are displayed in this submenu. The
values available are depending on the configuration of the RPH2.
Me a
Cu
> Me
F r
Cu
s
r
a
e
r
u
r
s
q
r
r
e
u
u
e
eme n t
n t Gr aph s
r e d T i me s
en c y
n t ( RMS )
L1
L2
- >
- >
12345678
L3
5.5.2.1 Command OUT

This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage
(phase L1) until the command is executed.
>
Me a s u r
C o mm a
CB S i
Ca l c u
Me a s u
4 . 5
e
n
g
l
r
L1
d T i me s
d OU T
na l
r e c
a t e d Op
e d Op .
9 . 5
12345
L2
L
- >
e
.
T
9
6
3
i v ed
T i me
i me
. 5ms
78
Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.

5.5.2.2 CB Signal received
This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage
(phase L1) until the auxiliary-contacts of the CB are switched.
Me a s u r
C o mm a
> CB S i
Ca l c u
Me a s u
123 . 3
L1
e
n
g
l
r
1
d
d
n
a
e
2
T i me s
OU T
a l
r e c
t e d Op
d Op .
4 . 1 12
12345
L2
L
- >
e
.
T
3
6
3
i v ed
T i me
i me
. 7ms
78
Page 61
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.
5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time
This submenu shows the calculated operating time according to the measured service
conditions (temperature, pressure, control voltage). If the compensation facility is not
active, the set values of "Operating Time CH1" (see 5.2.1).and "Operating Time CH2"
(see 5.2.2) are displayed.
Me a s u r
C o mm a
CB S i
> Ca l c u
Me a s u
128 . 7
e
n
g
l
r
1
L1
d
d
n
a
e
2
T i me s
OU T
a l
r e c
t e d Op
d Op .
9 . 0 12
12345
L2
L
- >
e
.
T
9
6
3
i v ed
T i me
i me
. 0ms
78
5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time

This submenu shows the measured operating times, assuming that the values for "Aux.
Timeshift CH1/CH2" (see 5.2.5, 5.2.6 and 4.1.2.1) have been determined correctly.
Me a s u r
C o mm a
CB S i
Ca l c u
> Me a s u
128 . 9
e
n
g
l
r
1
L1
d
d
n
a
e
2
T i me s
OU T
a l
r e c
t e d Op
d Op .
9 . 3 12
12345
L2
L
- >
e
.
T
8
6
3
i v ed
T i me
i me
. 9ms
78
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0.5 ms.
5.5.3 Frequency
This submenu shows the actual frequency of the reference voltage.
The resolution of the frequency measurement is 0,05 Hz.
Me a
Cu
Me
> F r
Cu
L1
s
r
a
e
r
u
r
s
q
r
r
e
u
u
e
eme n t
n t Gr aph
r e d T i me
en c y
n t ( RMS )
50
12345
L2
L
Page 62
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
s
s
- >
- >
, 00Hz
678
3
The switching moments (switching programs) are permanently corrected according to

the measured frequency.
Note: The measurement of the frequency works only when the reference voltage is
connected. If the reference voltage is missing the rated frequency is displayed instead.
5.5.4 Current (RMS)

This submenu shows the actual measured line current per phase.
Me a
Me
F r
> Cu
Co
s
a
e
r
n
u
s
q
r
t
0
r
u
u
e
r
L1
eme n t
r e d T i me
en c y
n t ( RMS )
o l Vo l t a
0
12345
L2
L
- >
ge
0
678
3
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

This submenu shows the actual measured control voltage.
Me a
F r
Cu
> Co
Ac
L1
s
e
r
n
t
u
q
r
t
u
r
u
e
r
a
eme n t
en c y
n t ( RMS )
o l Vo l t ag
l T emp e r a
61
123456
L2
L3
e
t u r e
, 2 V
78
5.5.6 Actual Temperature

This submenu shows the actual measured ambient temperature.
Me a s u r eme n t
C u r r e n t ( RM S )
Co n t r o l Vo l t a g e
> A c t u a l T emp e r a t u r e
T e mp e r a t u r e f . C o mp
61 , 2 V
12345678
L1
L2
L3
Page 63
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation

This submenu shows the averaged environmental temperature (see chapter 4.2)
Me a s u
Con t
Ac t u
> T emp
Add i
r
r
a
e
t
L1
eme n t
o l Vo l t age
l T emp e r a t u r e
r a t u r e f . C omp
i o n . Op . T i me s - >
+0 , 0
C
12345678
L2
L3
5.5.8 Additional Operating Times

The following submenus show the calculated additional times according to the service
conditions and the configuration of the RPH2.
5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1
This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 1 for the actual control voltage
per phase.
>
Ad
V
V
T
T
-
d i t
o l t
o l t
emp
emp
0 , 1
i
a
a
e
e
o
g
g
r
r
L1
n
e
e
a
a
-
. Op . T i me s - >
CH 1
CH 2
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
0 , 1
- 0 , 2ms
12345678
L2
L3
This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2
This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 2 for the actual control voltage
per phase.
Ad
V
> V
T
T
-
d i t
o l t
o l t
emp
emp
0 , 1
i
a
a
e
e
o
g
g
r
r
L1
n
e
e
a
a
-
. Op . T i me s - >
CH 1
CH 2
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
0 , 1
- 0 , 2ms
12345678
L2
L3
Page 64
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature
measured for channel 1 per phase.
Ad
V
V
> T
T
-
d i t
o l t
o l t
emp
emp
0 , 1
i
a
a
e
e
o
g
g
r
r
L1
n
e
e
a
a
-
. Op . T i me s - >
CH 1
CH 2
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
0 , 1
- 0 , 1ms
12345678
L2
L3

This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature
Ad
V
T
> T
P
-
d i t
o l t
emp
emp
r e s
0 , 1
i
a
e
e
s
o
g
r
r
u
L1
n
e
a
a
r
-
. Op . T i me s - >
CH 2
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
e CH 1
0 , 1
- 0 , 2ms
12345678
L2
L3

This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure
Ad
T
T
> P
P
-
d i t
emp
emp
r e s
r e s
0 , 1
L1
i
e
e
s
s
o
r
r
u
u
n
a
a
r
r
-
. Op . T i me s - >
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
e CH 1
e CH 2
0 , 1
- 0 , 1ms
12345678
L2
L3

This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure
Page 65
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Ad
T
T
P
> P
-
d i t
emp
emp
r e s
r e s
0 , 1
i
e
e
s
s
o
r
r
u
u
L1
n
a
a
r
r
-
. Op . T i me s - >
t u r e CH 1
t u r e CH 2
e CH 1
e CH 2
0 , 1
- 0 , 2ms
12345678
L2
L3
5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)

This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure per phase (L1, L2, L3).
Me
T
A
> P
P
a s u
emp
dd i
r e s
r e s
310
r
e
t
s
s
eme
r a t
i on
u r e
u r e
3
L1
n t
u r e
. Op
( L
( L
01
123
L2
f . C omp
. T i me s - >
1 / L2 / L3 )
1 )
307ba r
45678
L3
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA3.
5.5.10 Pressure (L1)

This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure.
Me
T
A
P
> P
a s u
emp
dd i
r e s
r e s
L1
r
e
t
s
s
eme n t
r a t u r e f
i o n . Op . T
u r e ( L1 /
u r e ( L1 )
3
12345
L2
L
. C omp
i me s - >
L2 / L3 )
10ba r
678
3
This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA1.
5.6
Auxiliary functions
5.6.1 Alarm Input

This submenu is for testing only. It shows the inputs (auxiliary contacts and position of
the neutral earthing switch) of the alarm-board (only available for module RPH2-xxS).
Page 66
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
5.6.2 Alarm Output

This submenu is for testing only. You can set the alarm-outputs individually by typing a
1 at the according position of the pattern shown on the display (only available for
module RPH2-xxS).
5.6.3 Error Type

If an internal fault is detected (selftest interval > 0 h), error flags are displayed in this
menu.
Error type 1:
Error type 2-4:
Error type 5-7:
Error type 8-10
Error type 11-13:
Error type 14-16:
Error type 17-19:
5.7
the switching command on input -x8:1 or -x8:6 is still bending

CH1 phase L1 is defective
Switching archive
This submenu shows the result of the last 8 switching operations.
List of messages:
Switching OK
NOT Switched
Command Time min
(no operation of the breaker)

(command impulse to short (<100 ms))
In the statusline the date and the time of the operation is displayed.
Ahead of the messages a reference to the archive entries is shown:
"n"
last operation
"n-1"
operation before
etc.
Page 67
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
6
6.1
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning preliminaries
Before initial operation of a RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller, time should be taken in
order to become familiar with operation of the device and, if a portable PC is available,
with the parameterization software also.
NOTE: After the RPH2 is connected to the supply voltage the first time, or after a self
test, it will last about 20 seconds until the green LED is illuminated and the relay is
ready for operation (see also 2.4.2.2). If the green LED stays dark, please check at first
the proper connection of the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch
6.1.1 Settings
6.1.1.1 Factory Settings
Depending on the model, all values for CB-Data, compensation and all thresholds for
the alarms are set to 0, except:
System Frequency:
Control Voltage:
Switching Program:
Function Cannel 1:
Selftest Interval:
CT Rated Current
primary:
secondary:
50 Hz
125 V
Transformer
CB closing
24 h
1A
1A
Alarms:
Ref. Voltage Failure ->
Alarm1
Neutral intermediate ->
Alarm2
All other alarm functions are inactive.
6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings
Before the RPH2 is ready to operate, all relevant settings must be completed. These
data must be set before the first operation (depending on the model):
System frequency (5.1.2)

Control voltage (5.1.3)
Rated pressure (5.1.4)
Switching program (5.1.5)
Function channel 1 (5.1.6)
Operating times of each pole (5.2.1, 5.2.2)
Arcing Times (5.2.3, 5.2.4)
All data for compensation and adaptive control (5.2.7....5.2.16)
Actual control voltage (5.3.4)
Ratings of external transducers (5.3.5, 5.3.6)
Page 68
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
All other parameters are not essential for operation.

To evaluate the necessary data, use the configuration checklist shown on the last
pages of this service manual.
6.1.2 Inspection
Check whether the external wiring corresponds to the relevant RPH2 wiring diagram.
Particularly whether the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch position
signals are wired. If a switching of the neutral is not intended, then it is necessary to
short circuit the relevant input terminals of the RPH2 (-X6:8 with -X8:11 for neutral
isolated or -X6:8 with -X8:12 for neutral grounded).
Make sure that the case is properly earthed. If external sensors are necessary, they
are to be installed according to the manufacturer's information. Check whether the
plug-in unit is sitting firmly and the fixing screws are tightened.
Measure the actual RPH2 control voltage with a multimeter. This value (depending on
the model) is required for parameterization (5.3.4).
Check the 48 V field voltage between the terminals -X6:8 and-X6:11 (ground).
Measure the voltage at the inputs of the external transducers (approx. 24 VDC).
Compare the displayed values on the RPH2 for control voltage, hydraulic pressure and
ambient temperature (only models RPH2-xxA) with the externally measured ones.
Verify the connections of the voltage and current transformer circuits (current only for
model RPH2-xI) to the correct terminals (100/3V or 220/3V, 1A or 5A) of the RPH2.
The two functions of the menu [Aux. Functions] maybe helpful by testing the external
connections:
The proper connection of the CBs auxiliary contacts to the RPH2 (only model
RPH2-Sxx) can easily be checked by the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Input]. When
the circuit breaker is in the closed position you must see three 1 at the first positions in
the status line.
>
Au x . Fun c t
A l a rm I n
A l a r m Ou
Se l f t e s t
RPH2 V 3 .
L1
i on s
pu t
t pu t
E RROR
04 16 - 03 - 99
11100001
12345678
L2
L3
When the breaker is in the open position, three 0 will be displayed.

If the remote reset input is activated, at the fourth position a 1 must be displayed.
Page 69
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
By using the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Output] you can activate individually each
alarm relay by typing a 1 at the according position of the pattern. So the external
wiring of the alarm circuits can be checked on correct function.
6.1.3 First operation

When all inspections are done, operate the dead circuit breaker via the RPH2. On
Point-on-Wave-Controllers with option S check, if the measured operating times are
correct, otherwise adjust the values for [Aux.Timeshift] according to 4.1.2.1. Prove that
the command impulse to the RPH2 is of sufficient length.
For the first load switchings, we recommend using an oscillograph to measure the
currents of the three phases together with the reference voltage, in order to verify that
the unit is working correctly. It is helpful if the three relayed drive commands can also
be recorded on additional oscillograph traces.
By using a RPH2 with the option I the currents during switching can be displayed and
analysed (see 5.5.1).
If the results are not satisfactory you must adapt the pole operating times and/ or the
arcing times to achieve the optimal function.
Page 70
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
Configuration Checklist RPH2

System Data
16 2/3 Hz
System Frequency
50 Hz
Control Voltage (48V...250V)
........................V
Rated Pressure
.........................bar
Switching program: Transformer
Shunt Reactor
60 Hz
Capacitor Bank
User Program
Point on Wave
Function Channel 1
Language
Selftest Interval
L2
L3
T_C1 Neutral isolated
ms
T_C1 Neutral grounded
ms
T_C2 Neutral isolated
ms
T_C2 Neutral grounded
ms
CB Close
German
L1
CB Open
English
(RPH2-1xx only)
French
Free language ...................................
.............Hours
CB Data:
CB Data
L1
L2
L3
Operating Time CH1
ms
Operating Time CH2
ms
Arcing Time CH1
ms
Arcing Time CH2
ms
Aux.Timeshift CH1
ms
Aux.Timeshift CH2
ms
Adaptive Control Weighting Factor ....................

Compensation
Yes
No
kU1 Voltage CH1
....................
kP1 Pressure CH1
....................
kU2 Voltage CH2
....................
kP2 Pressure CH2
....................
Page 71
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

Temperature Compensation:
Switching Channel 1
Temperature
+50 C
+40 C
+30 C
+20 C
+10 C
0 C
-10 C
-20 C
-30 C
-40 C
-50 C
Switching Channel 2
Delta_t
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
Temperature
+50 C
+40 C
+30 C
+20 C
+10 C
0 C
-10 C
-20 C
-30 C
-40 C
-50 C
Delta_t
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
Analogue Data:
Thresholds:
Current max. (peak)
....................
Control Voltage max
.....................
Control Voltage min
.....................
Temperature max
....................
Temperature min
.....................
Pressure min
.....................
bar
Pressure max
....................
bar
Actual Control Voltage ....................
V (to be measured and set at site)
CT rated current prim. ....................
CT rated current sec.
1A
5A
Temperature:
Value at 4 mA
.....................
Value at 20 mA
.....................
Value at 4 mA
......................
bar
Value at 20 mA
......................
bar
Pressure:
Page 72
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02

Alarms:
Alarmtext
Alarm Functions
Reset Obligatory
Lock-out
Alarm List
Lock-out
Frequency min
Frequency max
Current max
Ref.Voltage Failure
RTC Impulse Failure
Neutral Intermediate
Neutral Grounded
Neutral Isolated
Selftest ERROR
Selftest CH1 ERROR
Selftest CH2 ERROR
Operating Time min
Operating Time max
Drive Mech.Failure
Archive Full
Archive Failure
Control Voltage min
Control Voltage max
Temperature min
Temperature max
Temp. Transducer Fault
Pressure min
Pressure max
Press. Transducer Fault
Page 73
Issue 3 58.020.034 E
2004-02
CHECK--LIST
COMMISSIONNING & MAINTENANCE
Point on Wave type RPH2
58.020.035EN
GRID
The aim of this document is to describe the different defaults which can occur during the
commissioning and/or the maintenance of the RPH2.
1. Wiring / assembling /schemes
1.1.
Standard wiring of the RPH2 with full options and types of cables
to be used for wiring
1.1.1. Circuit-breaker orders :
Orders : shielded cable with earthed screen.

In order to avoid coupling between signals, it is highly recommended to separate the input
signal of the RPH2 (X8-1 & X8-6) and the outputs (X8-2 to X8-4 and X8-7 to X8-9) in 2
different cables (mandatory when the distance between the control room and the CB is above
500m and the auxiliary supply is up to 200Vdc)
58.020.035EN01
Page : 1 / 11
1.1.2. Control inputs and alarm outputs :
Cables : for auxiliary contacts (CB position) it is mandatory to use twisted pairs shielded
cables with earthed screen.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 2 / 11
1.1.3. Reference voltage and current inputs :
Shielded cable with earthed screen.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 3 / 11
1.1.4. Temperature sensor :
twisted pairs shielded cables with earthed screen.
1.2.
Earthing
The earthing terminal of the RPH2 (located on the right flange at the rear of the RPH2) must
be correctly wired to the earthing of the cabinet, which is also linked to the ground of the
control room.
A default on this earthing can damage the RPH2 in case of potentials coming from the
cables.
1.3.
Auxiliary supply
Symptoms :
-
No illuminated LED on the front of the RPH2 and no functional screen.
The RPH2 is not switched on. Check the auxiliary voltage between
Diagnostic :
terminals X6-10 and X6-11
Solutions :
-
Check the auxiliary cables otherwise change the RPH2
58.020.035EN01
Page : 4 / 11
1.4.
RPH2 not ready
Symptom :
Diagnostic :
-
The green LED Ready on the front panel is not illuminated.
Check the reference voltage input, his frequency, the key-switch position
or the detection of an internal fault during the self-test.
Mind the corresponding alarms can be disabled and this can be trappy !
Correct the default parameter
Solution :
1.5.
Order outputs
Symptom :
-
The RPH2 works correctly (without any alarm) but the delays between
orders are not as expected and the measured values are null.
Diagnostic :
-
Whether the RPH2 is used on opening or tripping, the channel A is with

priority ; Therefore a RPH2-1xxx must be wired between X8-1 for the
order input (opening or closing) and X8-3, X8-4 and X8-5 for the
outputs. If the RPH2-2xxx is used on closing, wired the channel A,

respectively channel B for opening.
Solution :
-
Change the wiring from channel B to channel A mainly for a RPH2-2xxx

used on closing
1.6.
Reference voltage
Symptoms :
-
Opening and/or closing operation detected but delays on outputs orders

not as expected.
Diagnostic :
-
The reference voltage is connected on a phase not corresponding to phase

1 of the RPH2.
Solution :
-
Change the wiring of the RPH2 : Make a rotation of the outputs wiring of
the RPH2. The phase corresponding to the reference voltage must be on
terminal X8-3, the next phase on X8-4 and the last one on X8-5 for
channel A, respectively X8-8, X8-9 and X8-10 for channel B.
-
Do the same permutation for connections of the auxiliary contacts and the
current measures (if option I available)
58.020.035EN01
Page : 5 / 11
1.7.
Too long order
Symptoms :
-
Alarm Command order
Even burn of the input order card if the order is continuous.
The opening or closing order sent to the RPH2 is too long, even
Diagnostic :
permanent.
Solution :
-
Change the electrical scheme, either by decreasing the impulse time (not
more than 500ms), or put an auxiliary relay to cut the order.
1.8.
Inactive screen
Symptoms :
-
Black screen or virtually transparent .
Bad contrast
Modify the contrast setting :
Diagnostic :
Solution :
1. Turn the key-switch to "OFF (Stop).
2. Push the [Enter] key and keep it pushed.

3. Turn the key on "OPERATION.
4. The contrast is modified from the darkest to the clearest image.

5. When the contrast is optimal, hold off the touch [Enter].
58.020.035EN01
Page : 6 / 11
2. Parameters /configuration problems

These problems may occur mainly on site during the commissioning of the RPH2.
2.1.
Symptom :
Diagnostic :
green LED Ready
Green Led not illuminated
Possible reasons :
-
The device detected an internal error during its self-test procedure (often
associated with L1 Led error : self-test error)
The reference voltage is not within the correct values (often associated
with L2 LED error : ref voltage error)
The measured frequency is out of expected range (programmed value +/10%)
The key switch is on the OFF position.
Self-test : try to switch off then on the RPH2 ; if the error remains the
Solution :
same, then change the RPH2.

-
Reference voltage (amplitude or frequency) : analyze of the electrical

scheme within the control room. Check the wiring.
Switch : turn it to Operation position
2.2.
Alarms com. order min/max and discrepancy between
calculated and measured values.
Symptom :
Diagnostic :
Solution :
Alarm com order min/max illuminated (often L4 : Com order min)
The RPH2 is not able to calculate correct values even if the auto-adaptive
correction is set on.
Use the Eliminating Irregular Operating Time Alarms and influence on
adaptive Control procedure (see annex 1), in reference to the wiring and the
used channel. Check the software version of the RPH2.
2.3.
Alarms
2.3.1. Alarms list generated by the RPH2

58.020.035EN01
Page : 7 / 11
-Lock-out : The RPH2 is locked-out, thats to say it doesnt work properly.
-Selftest error : if, during the self test procedure, the RPH2 gives an error, (e.g. memory
failed, ), then this alarm is active.
-Selftest CH1 error : Detected error on channel A (intrenal to RPH2).

-Selftest CH2 error : id. For channel B.
-Reference voltage failure : if there is a modification on the network voltage, this alarm
blinks.
-RTC impulse failure : loss of the clock synchronization signal.
-Frequency min : the frequency check is highly important because if the frequency drops
under 90% of the programmed value, the RPH2 is not able to give a good
synchronization. Then the alarm is active above this limit.
-Frequency max : If the frequency is above 110% of the rated one, the RPH2 wont make a
good synchronization.
-Control voltage min : The coil voltage has a great influence over the operation times and
therefore the operation speed. Below a rated value, we cant synchronize. This alarm is
then on.
-Control voltage max : id. but for an overrun of the max voltage.
-Command time CH1 min : refers to a too short command order . This could induce the
incapability of the RPH32 for giving orders on all phases with the right delays. This
alarm could also happen when a false order (voltage impulse on the command) is seen
by the RPH2. This can be the result of coupling between interconnection cables (from
the BCU or the control room to the CB)
-Command time CH2 min : id. for channel B.
-Current max : When too high currents are detected, this alarm is on. The current limit can
be settled.
-Neutral intermediate : Signals an unwanted state of neutral connection (neither isolated, nor
grounded)
-Neutral grounded : The neutral is grounded (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-12)
-Neutral isolated : The neutral is isolated (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-11)
-Operating time min : signals a too short operating time. Therefore the synchronization is
not possible as the calculated times and the measured times dont match.
-Operating time max : signals a too long operating time. Therefore the synchronization is
not possible as the calculated times and the measured times dont match.
-Drive mechanical failure : Default of the mechanical drive ; the corresponding pole position
didnt change (could also be a problem with auxiliary contact wirings)
-Archive full : The RPH2 is able to store up to 1000 archives ; when we reach 900 records,
this alarm is lighted.
-Archive failure : memory default.
-Temprature min : The CB is able to perform within a temperature range. If the external
temperature drops below the limit, the dispersion in the operating times increase and
then a good synchronization is not possible.
-Temperature max : id. For high temperature.
-Temperature transducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the temperature sensor or its
wiring.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 8 / 11
-Pressure min : For hydraulic pressure command, the oil pressure is mandatory to determine
the operation times. When the pressure is too low, these times are corrupted.
-Pressure max : id. For higher pressures.
-Pressure tranducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the hydraulic pressure sensor, or
its wiring.
2.3.2. Standard alarms list settled within the RPH2 (for a spring mechanism)
The following list is based on the standard settings as programmed in AHT factory. These
parameters can be changed, and therefore it is mandatory to check the alarm list before
using this.
Alarm
Symptom
L1 : self test error
Alarm L1 lighted
L2 : Ref. voltage
Alarm L2 lighted
L3 : Control voltage
Alarm L3 lighted
L4 : Comm. Time min
Alarm L4 lighted
failure
min/max
Diagnostic
Solution
Internal error
Try to switch off then
self-test procedure.
alarm is always on,
detected during the
Loss of reference
voltage or bad
frequency value.
on the RPH2. If the

change the RPH2.
Analyze the electrical

scheme.
Auxiliary voltage out
Check the battery
Command time on
Analyze the electrical
of limits.
opening or closing
order is too short
voltage
scheme.
(<100ms)
L5 : Neutral
intermediate
Alarm L5 lighted
Neutral position
check the
the RPH2 is not able
X6-8 and X8-11 or
unknown, therefore
to know the correct
switching program :
L6 : Oper. Time
min/max
Alarm L6 lighted
Check the calculated
and measured values
connections between
12 (depending on
neutral position).
Use the procedure
Eliminating Irregular
Operating Time
Alarms and Influence
On Adaptive Control
L7 : Temperature
min/max
Alarm L7 lighted
Check the wiring of
Check the cable,
sensor if the ambient
sensor.
the temperature
temperature is inside
either change the
the programmed
limits.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 9 / 11
3. Maintenance problems
3.1.
No start-up
Symptoms :
-
All LEDs are out (even the first green one) but the auxiliary supply is
correctly wired between terminals X6-10 et X6-11
Diagnostic :
-
A DC permanent voltage (>35Vdc) is present on the order input signal

(X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel B) and blocks the RPH2.
Solution :
-
Check the voltages on terminals X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel
B) during the self-test.
If there is a permanent DC voltage >35Vdc, 2 solutions are possible : first,

using a resistor between the related terminal and the earth (X8-1 for
channel A and X8-6 for channel B) in order to decrease this voltage. For
example : for a measured value of 52Vdc measured on X8-1, a resistor
value equals to 820 / 12W should decrease this voltage to 9V and
therefore release the RPH2. Second solution : we can put a signal diode on
X8-1 and X8-6 inputs.
3.2.
Destroy of inputs
Symptmes :
-
Some inputs (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are destroyed (burnt
components on the electronic card).

-
High frequency perturbations are bbeing measured on these inputs.
Some composants or the printed circuit of the acquisition card are burnt.
Remplace the corresponding card or the complete RPH2.
Diagnostic :
Solution :
-
Put a varistor on these inputs (to be calibrated in accordance to the

voltage)between the inputs and the earth.
Install a filter on the reference voltage input.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 10 / 11
3.3.
Return polarity
Symptoms :
-
Some inputs/outputs of the RPH2 (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are
damaged.
A DC voltage above 60Vdc is measured on the auxiliary contacts inputs.
Damage of the auxiliary contacts inputs by return polarity.
Try to determine the root cause of this interference voltage and, if
Diagnostic :
Solution :
possible, take it out (In case of coupling between cables, it souldnt be

easy to eliminate)
-
Wire a resistor between the concerned input and the earth. Mind this
resistor will heat and then put a protection against unwell contact.
58.020.035EN01
Page : 11 / 11
Dismantling and recovery of

components of circuit breaker
Presentation
In this module
This module contains the following subjects:

Subject
I -- Introduction
II -- General remarks
III -- Categories and treatment of the materials:
1 -- Treatment of the SF6 gas
2 -- Materials to be recycled
3 -- Waste products to be destroyed by incineration
4 -- Special wastes
01--2011
Page
2
3
4--5
L80--000EN02
1/6
GRID

I -- Introduction
During the elimination phase for a High Voltage gas insulated circuit
breaker, at the end of its service life, the quality of the treatment of wastes
generated represents the essential environmental aspect.
This manual proposes, for each element of a High Voltage gas insulated
circuit breaker, the recommended method of elimination for the various
materials it comprises, as well as any possible precautions to be taken.
01--2011
L80--000EN02
2/6
GRID

II -- General remarks
It is necessary to proceed with a maximum amount of dismantling, so as to
ensure the best recycling possible of the materials.
Various categories of materials can be distinguished depending on the
waste processing channel followed:
DS The SF6 gas to be recycled or reprocessed
DS The metals to be recycled (without taking into account any surface
treatment, paintwork or electro--silverplating)
DS Waste products to be destroyed by incineration or sent to the waste
dump depending on the channel available.
DS Special wastes
01--2011
L80--000EN02
3/6
GRID

III -- Categories and treatment of the materials
1 -- Treatment of
SF6 gas
The SF6 gas will be recycled in accordance with the recommendations of

the IEC 60480 Standard.
However, when recovering the SF6 gas, it is important to respect the following precautions:
-- Weigh the recipients used before and after filling, so as to ensure
traceability of the weights recovered
-- For each recipient, carry out a measurement of the purity of the SF6
gas and a search for the decomposition products (SO2, HF)
In case of absence of a local waste processing channel for the recycling of
SF6, we recommend a return to our site in Villeurbanne, where we propose reprocessing via our European service providers.
2 -- Materials to be
recycled
Metals form the main constituent of a gas insulated substation.

The main types of metal making up a substation are:
-- Steel: steelwork structure, fasteners, electrical cubicle frames, etc.
-- Aluminium: moulded or mechanical welded enclosures, conductor bars,
electrodes, etc.
-- Bolted fasteners, threaded rods, rating and name plates
-- Bare copper: electrical contacts, etc.
-- Insulated copper: electrical cable
It is important to separate these different metals when dismantling the substation at the end of its service life. In particular for small sub--assemblies
made up of various materials.
In certain simple cases, it is sufficient to remove the fasteners ensuring the
assembly and, in other cases, specific instructions shall be given.
The aluminium and copper elements must, under no circumstances,
be mixed. Specific waste processing channels associated with these
materials do not allow for perfect separation during their processing.
In cases where it is impossible to separate them, the component
must be sent for incineration.
01--2011
L80--000EN02
4/6
GRID

III -- Categories and treatment of the materials (contd.)
3 -- Waste products to This type of waste includes the rest of the materials used in the composibe destroyed by
tion of a gas insulated substation, other than for a few very specific cases.
incineration
These waste products mainly include:
-- Parts in epoxy resin: insulating cone in the case of circuit breakers with
insertion resistance
-- Plastic parts loaded with glass fibre (insulating tubes, etc.)
-- Seals and gaskets, rubber bands, roller bearings
-- Insulators (support or interrupting chamber) composites etc.
Where possible, we recommend that this type of waste be sent via incineration channels with waste heat recovery.
4 -- Special wastes
Certain elements, due to their function or the material constituting them,

cannot be sent via a recycling or incineration channel.
They include the following components:
-- Insulating parts from the interrupting chamber
-- Absorbent molecular sieves
-- The active elements in electrical cubicles
-- Ceramic insulators (support or interrupting chamber) or those still called
porcelain, etc.
These waste products will follow specific channels and/or undergo certain
types of processing.
Precise instructions will be supplied for these types of components.
01--2011
L80--000EN02
5/6
GRID

01--2011
L80--000EN02
6/6
GRID
Equipment end of life
Management of SF6 gas
SF6 gas : Environmental impacts

Introduction
The SF6 gas contributes to the greenhouse effect:

The greenhouse effect is a natural phenomena, which by capturing a part of
the infra--red rays reflected from ground to space, enables the Earth to have
an average temperature of 15C.
The most abundant gases, which participate in the creation of this greenhouse effect are Water Vapour, Carbon Dioxide, Methane. However, since the
beginning of the industrial era, Man has released gases into the atmosphere,
which artificially increase the greenhouse effect.
Even if Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is only present in the environment in low
levels, it creates a greenhouse gas, which has the capacity to absorb the
infra--red rays emitted by the Earth, which is 22,200 times higher than that of
Carbon Dioxide.
N.B. : 1 kg of SF6 gas emissions are, thus, the equivalent of
22,200 kg of Carbon Dioxide, which corresponds to the greenhouse effect gas waste released by a gasoline vehicle covering
120,000 km.
SF6 gas is used in High--and Medium--Voltage switchgear for its breaking and
insulation capacities.
The SF6 emissions can be generated in the equipment manufacturing, operating, maintenance and decommissioning processes. The losses are, either,
accidental (equipment breakage),or structural (equipments leaktightness).
Under no circumstances, SF6 gas should be released to the environment:
N.B. : In accordance with the International Kyoto Agreements,
European Regulations on fluorinated gases and IEC 62271--303
applicable standards (e.g.. IEC 61634), SF6 gas handling operations (filling, recovery) must be carried out by trained and qualified personnel, using tools and procedures enabling gas releases
to be limited.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
1/6
GRID
SF6 gas safety rules

New SF6
D Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is a colourless, odourless and non--toxic gas.

D However, it is a gas, which does not maintain life.
This gas is heavier than air and the lower parts such as trenches or cable
troughs can contain a strong concentration of this gas, which could lead to
asphyxia.
N.B. : The maximum permissible concentration on a workstation,
assuming that people stay there 8 hours a day, 5 days a week,
is 1000 ppm (i.e. 0.1%) of the volume. This very low level is a
standard value for all non--toxic gases, which are not usually
present in the atmosphere.
Every recipient containing new SF6 gas should be labelled as indicated

below:
Clean SULPHUR
HEXALUORIDE
SF
6
S 7/9 Keep container tightly closed in a well-ventilated place.
S 20/21 When using, do not eat, drink or
smoke.
S 45 In the event of an accident, contact a
doctor immediately (if possible show the doctor
this label).
S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer
to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet.
S 63 If inhaled, move the victim out of the
contaminated area and keep them still.
S51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
2/6
GRID
SF6 gas safety rules (contd.)

Used SF6
D Under the influence of electrical arcing, SF6 gas can be broken down into
sub--products, which are more or less toxic and/or corrosive.
D Depending on their nature, these products can be irritant for the mucous
membranes, the respiratory tracts and the skin.
The SF6 decomposition products are brought to light, even when present in
very low levels, by a strong pungent and sulphur odour.
Every recipient containing used SF6 gas should be labelled:
Used SF6 gas will be stored in a pressurised, leak--tight container, which must
be resistant to decomposition products (valves, connectors and piping included) and will be regularly inspected in accordance with the standards in force.
The maximum quantity of polluted gas stored on site will be defined in accordance with the rules in force.
LiquidGAS,
toxic,
corrosive,
n.s.a.
C - CORROSIVE
T+ - VERY TOXIC
(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6)

R 26/27/28 VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACT
WITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED.
S 7/9 Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place.

S 20/21 When using, do not eat, drink or smoke.
S 38 In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory
equipment.
S 45 In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately
(if possible show the doctor this label).
S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet.
S 63 If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area
and keep them still.
S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
3/6
GRID
SF6 gas safety rules (contd.)

Used SF6
For all interventions, it is necessary to respect the following instructions:

In every zone where the SF6 is implemented
D It is forbidden to smoke, eat, drink or store food.
D Ventilation must be sufficient.
D It is forbidden to use a fuel engine.
D Individual protection must be worn, following the table below.
Individual
protection
SF6 Technical
grade.
Conforming
Non--conforming SF6
SF6 including including toxic prolow levels of ducts.
Pure SF6 and toxic products .
SF6 (post--arcing).
used
gas
without
toxic
Studies of the comproducts.
partment containing
polluted SF6.
Wearing of
Gloves
Wearing of Eye
Protection
Wearing of a
Simple Face
Mask
Wearing of a
Cartridge Filter
Face Mask
Wearing of a
Combination
N.B. : For the elimination, the individual protection is managed in HIW
D Furthermore, the personnel intervening on the equipment, must respect at

minimum the following instructions : after draining gas,
-- Remove the SF6 decomposition products immediately after the opening
of the equipment in order to avoid a chemical re--combination with water.
-- Ventilation must be sufficient.
-- Use an appropriate vacuum cleaner equipped with a dust filter and wipe
with a clean, dry cloth.
-- Avoid shaking the cloth
-- Block the SF6 decomposition products (i.e. molecular sieve, cloth soiled
with a 3% sodium hydroxide solution during 24 h) and destroy as dangerous
waste.
D Avoid contact with soiled parts or dust (Individual Protection)
Soiled individual protection, soiled dusters, soiled molecular sieve, polluted
gas, must be destroyed as dangerous industrial waste. Polluted gas will be
incinerated or recycled depending on its level of pollution.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
4/6
GRID
Transportation of SF6 gas

D Transportation of SF6 gas is considered as a transportion of dangerous
materials. It must be carried out in accordance with the regulations in force,
especially the ADR Regulations in Europe (European Agreement concerning
the International Road Transport of dangerous materials).
D For each transport, each container must be labelled, the label must be
visible and be combined with a Health & Safety / Transportation label and a
Transportation slip for dangerous materials must be drawn up.
D In the event of a transportation of SF6 gas containing toxic products
(waste), the document for dangerous materials must include the ADR 2.2 T
C classification with a Safety Plan. The combined label will be the following :
USED SF6
SULPHUR
HEXAFLUORIDE
LiquidGAS,
toxic,
corrosive,
n.s.a.
C - CORROSIVE
T+ - VERY TOXIC
(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6)
R 26/27/28 VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACT

WITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED.
S 7/9 Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place.
S 20/21 When using, do not eat, drink or smoke.
S 38 In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.
S 45 In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately (if possible
show the doctor this label).
S 61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / Safety
Data Sheet.
S 63 If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area and keep them
still.
S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.
D Loading and unloading operations are carried out by trained and qualified
personnel in accordance with the instructions in force.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
5/6
GRID
Applicable documentation
International Standards
D IEC 60 376 : Technical Quality specifications of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6)

for use in electrical devices.
D IEC 60 480 : guidelines concerning the testing and treatment of Sulphur
Hexaluoride (SF6) sampled on electrical devices and specifications concerning re--use.
D IEC 62 271--303 : high--voltage switchgear use and handling operations
of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) in high--voltage switchgear.
Technical guides
D SF6 Practical Handling instructions -- CIGRE Brochure 273 : SF6

Practical Handling guide
D SF6 Recycling Guide (Revision 2003) -- CIGRE Brochure 234 -- August
2003 -- PARIS : SF6 recycling guide
European Regulations
European Regulations (EC) No842/2006 of 17th of May 2006 concerning certain greenhouse effect fluorinated gases.
01--2011
L80--001EN02
6/6
GRID

Presentation
Introduction
These maintenance directives incorporate measures for avoiding the hazards

involved in the application of SF6 gas to switchgear.
Such directives are protective measures and recommendations for the user
of SF6 switchgear.
Fundamental
rules
Instructions for performance of work on SF6 gas switchgear are given in the
appropriate instruction manuals.
Switchgear may only be opened after the preparations for scavenging have
been completed.
In this module

Topic
Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus
Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear
Recapitulation of important instructions
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
L81--001EN02
1/4
GRID

Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus
Principle and
precautions
The table below gives the principle of evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus and
precautions to take :
Step
1
2
3
4
01--2011
Action
De--energize apparatus, switch--off where applicable and earth.
Connect the servicing unit to the gas filling nipple by means of a
hose and using an adsorber filter.
Remove the SF6 gas using the vacuum pump. Depending on the
gas volume ; it can be stored for re--use as per indications of IEC
standard.
Fill gas compartment if possible with nitrogen or dry compressed air
at rated pressure and subsequently, discharge outdoors (if possible
through an absorber filter).
L81--001EN02
2/4
GRID

Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear
Precautions to take
At the time of the opening--up SF6 gas switchgear, take the precautions
below :
DS Open--up SF6 switchgear only after the gas has been evacuated and the
pressure inside the apparatus has been reduced to that of atmospheric pressure.
DS Put the ventilation system in operation or ensure that fresh air circulates
in some other manner when switchgear which contains decomposition
products is opened (e.g. circuit--breaker).
DS Wear suitable fresh air breathing apparatus if there is even the slightest
possibility that personnel working on the equipment could be put in danger
through inhalation of hazardous amounts of gas vapor from powdery decomposition products.
DS Wear special overalls when working on opened--up SF6 switchgear which
contains powdery decomposition products. After completing work remove
overalls.
DS Avoid stirring--up dust and powder from SF6 switchgear. Difficult to remove
dust can be removed with dry non--fibrous rags. A vacuum cleaner should be
used to remove loose dust. The vacuum cleaner filter should be able to retains
particles of a least 1 m in size.
DS Items (such as rags, vacuum cleaner, throw--away--overalls, gloves, etc.)
which come in contact with the decomposition products must be collected and
neutralized so that the dust cannot be transferred. Before getting rid of these
items neutralize in a 3 percent soda solution for 24 hours. verify the degree
of neutralization after 24 hours. When soda is added, no bubbles should be
result. If there are bubbles repeat the neutralization.
DS Under all circumstances ensure that the decomposition products neither
come in contact with skin, eyes, clothes, nor that they are swallowed or
inhaled. Pay special attention to cleanliness of body, clothes and work-bench. Dust or powder that comes in contact with skin must be washed away
with plenty of water.
It is advisable to wash face, neck, arms and hands with soap and plenty of
water before work--breaks and after stoppage of work.
DS Avoid eating, drinking, smoking or storing eatables in rooms or outdoors
near to opened SF6 switchgear which may contain arc--decomposed powder.
01--2011
L81--001EN02
3/4
GRID

Recapitulation of important instructions
Reminder
Pure, non--contaminated SF6 gas is non--poisonous. Electrical discharges

and fault--switching arcs will give rise to different grades of poisonous decomposition products. In small amounts gaseous decomposition products produce -- within seconds and before any poisonous effects can take place -warning symptoms, such as an unpleasant piercing odor, nasal, mouth and
eye irritations, which enable working personnel to withdraw to safety. Solid
decomposition products (powdery residues from switching) can cause skin
irritations. SF6 is about five times heavier than air, and in the absence of turbulence, results in the gas collecting just above ground level and causing suffocation through a deficiency of oxygen.
Important
instructions
The table below recapitulates the important instructions to follow at the time
of handling of used SF6 gas and decomposition products :
No.
1
6
7
01--2011
Instruction
As soon as an unpleasant, piercing odor from decomposition products
becomes perceptible leave the substation room without delay. enter
the room only after thorough ventilation or when wearing suitable oxygen breathing masks (with filtering or fresh air device).
After disturbances, enter the substation room only after having thoroughly aired the room or when wearing independent of ambient--air
operating oxygen breathing masks, or alternatively, after verifying by
measurement that the ambient air contains at least 17% volume of
oxygen, especially if, one has to reckon with the concentration of SF6
in hazardous amounts.
Enter rooms located below, and connected with the substation--rooms
after thorough ventilation only, or when wearing oxygen breathing
masks which operate independent of the ambient--air, or alternatively,
after having verified by measurement that the ambient air contains at
least 17% volume of oxygen.
Ensure that the room ventilation operates satisfactorily, whilst maintenance work is being performed on SF6 switchgear (discharging and
filling of gas, opening and cleaning of equipment).
When working on opened SF6 switchgear protect skin against contact
with gas and avoid swallowing or inhaling of gas. Ensure body, clothing
and work--bench cleanliness. Wear special work--overalls and after
completion of work discard latter.
Wash skin which comes in contact with powder deposits with plenty of
water. Before work--breaks and after work wash face, neck, arms and
hands thoroughly with soap and plenty of water.
Do not stir--up powder deposits resulting from arc--switching. Remove
sticky powder with dry rags. Use suitable vacuum cleaner with paper-filter to remove loose powder. Discard used items and filter--bags in
such a manner that powder deposit does not spread. Before discarding
neutralize used items.
Avoid eating, drinking and storing eatables in rooms with opened SF6
switchgear which contains powder deposits.
L81--001EN02
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Reminder
Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.
In this module

Topic
06--2011
Page
2
3
5
6
L31--138EN/03
1/10
GRID
Installation

Necessary product
Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).
Necessary tools
List of the tools necessary for the installing :

Mark
(1)
Handling
06--2011
Diagram
Designation
Number
Lifting strap
(3 m)
The support--frame assembly operations and lifting

the pole should be performed by at least two persons.
L31--138EN/03
2/10
GRID
Installation

Introduction
If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary

components to the assembling.
Necessary
components

Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(2)
Support
(3)
Support
(5)
Screws
H M16-45
(7)
Screws
H M16-35
16
(9)
Washer
NORDLOCK NL16 SS
16
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
3/10
GRID
Installation
Support--frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary
components,
continued
Mark
06--2011
Diagram
Designation
Number
(20)
Screws
H M16-45
16
(21)
Strengthening piece
(24)
Strengthening piece
(25)
Strengthening piece
L31--138EN/03
4/10
GRID
Installation

Dismantling the case
of the poles
Remove the side panels of the case.

NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and
C.
Preparing the pole
D Sling the A column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).
D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover
laying :
-- first, the end of the column,
-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure
the correct installing of the frame supports.
X minimumminimum = 260 mm
1
1
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
5/10
GRID
Installation
Process
Step
1
Action
-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.
10
x1
2x2
7
5
H M16--45
H M16--35
2
10
2x2
7
H M16--35
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
6/10
GRID
Installation

Process, continued
Step
3
Action
x4
20
3
21
4
25
H M16--45
10
2x2
7
2
H M16--35
5
10
3
2x2
7
H M16--35
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
7/10
GRID
Installation

Process, continued
Step
6
Action
21
3
2x2
20
25
21
25
2
7
H M16--45
Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with

the use of the screws (20).
x2
20
H M16--45
24
24
x2
20
24
24
H M16--45
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
8/10
GRID
Installation

Process, continued
Step
8
Action
Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.
18 daN.m
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
9/10
GRID
Installation
06--2011
L31--138EN/03
10/10
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Necessary tools
List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the
pole :
Mark
Diagram
(1)
In this module
Designation
Number
LIFTING STRAP
SPANSET (3 m -- 1000 kg)

Topic
Page
2
3
Lifting the pole

Warning
11--2011
Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact

ALSTOM.
Any faults or cracks in the column may render the procedure
dangerous.
L31--200EN/06
1/4
GRID
Installation
Lifting the pole

Process
Install the two flexible lifting straps (1), placing these at the end of the column.
By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the
base of the frame.
Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure
guidance of the pole at the time of lifting.
Lift the pole with precaution.
10
11--2011
L31--200EN/06
2/4
GRID
Installation

Process
The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step
1
Action
Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground
attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the orientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.
If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that

the upper plate is level.
Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using
nut.
Remove the lifting straps.
Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.
3
4
5
18 daN.m
Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the
module entitled Tightening Torques and in accordance with the
diameters of the anchoring points.
12
11--2011
L31--200EN/06
3/4
GRID
Installation
11--2011
L31--200EN/06
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Diagram
In this module

Topic
01--2011
Page
2
3
4
L31--504EN/03
1/4
GRID
Installation
Necessary
components
pole) :
Mark
Necessary products
and accessories
Designation
Number
(1)
Terminal
(3)
Screws
H M12--45
List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the installing :
ALSTOM
Grid
reference
01--2011
Diagram
Diagram
Designation
--01861262
ISOPROPANOL (1 l)
--01835106
204--9
Vaseline 204--9
--01835118
Contactal grease
--01831320
A400
Abrasive paper A400
--02212337
Scotch Brite A--VF
--02212334
Rag
--02211842
N4
Round brush No.4
--02211831
N16
Brush No.16
L31--504EN/03
2/4
GRID
Installation
Preparing the
contact grease
The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.

CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease
Preparing the
contact surfaces
The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :
Step
Action
Diagram
X2
01--2011
Remove the temporary screws

from the terminal pads X1 and
X2.
Dry rub with fine emery cloth.
Eliminate the dust produced.
Coat
with
GREASE.
Wipe with a clean rag, leaving

just a thin layer of grease.
Rub over the grease with waterproof abrasive paper A400.
X1
CONTACT
L31--504EN/03
3/4
GRID
Installation
Process
Assemble immediately the terminals (1) on the interrupting chambers (2) after
preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); use
CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.
2
2
x 4
3
Comment
01--2011
H M12--45
5 daN.m
D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :

R 2
D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the
same way.
L31--504EN/03
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Diagram
Necessary tools
List of the tools necessary :

Mark
Diagram
(12)
In this module
Designation
Number
Lifting strap
(3 m)

Topic
Page
2
3
4

02--2011
L31--605EN/02
1/4
GRID
Installation

Necessary
components
pole) :
Mark
Necessary products
02--2011
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Capacitor
(3)
Support
(4)
Support
(depending on the apparatus)
(5)
Screws
H M12-30
(8)
Screws
H M12-45
(9)
Screws
H M12-25
(1)
Spacer
or
S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.
L31--605EN/02
2/4
GRID
Installation

Installing
the supports
x 2
x 2
5
02--2011
4
4
H M12--30
5 daN.m
H M12--30
5 daN.m
L31--605EN/02
3/4
GRID
Installation

Process
Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) -- on the
opposite side as the bosse of the housing (13) -- using the screws (8)
and (9).
NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor
support (4) side.
To avoid the rotation of the interrupting chambers, insert a wedge (13)

under the supports of the capacitors (3)--(4) after installing.
3 -- 4
13
H M12--25
5 daN.m
13
x 2
1
1
9
x 2
10
H M12--25
5 daN.m
4
10
x 2
H M12--45
5 daN.m
02--2011
L31--605EN/02
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Diagram
In this module

Topic
Page
2
3

Installing the stress--shields
02--2011
L31--664EN/02
1/4
GRID
Installation

Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
components
pole) :
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Stress--shields ring
(2)
Bracket
(3)
Screws
H M10-30
Necessary product
MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.
Assembling
Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not
tighten.
2
3
x 4
H M10--30
02--2011
L31--664EN/02
2/4
GRID
Installation
Installing stress-- shields

Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
components
pole) :
Mark
Diagram
(5)
Designation
Number
Screws
H M12-30
Necessary product
LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)
Process
Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)
using the screws (5).
NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with LOCTITE 262.
4
1
1
5
1
x 4
H M10--30
3,2 daN.m
x 4
5
H M12--30
5 daN.m
02--2011
L31--664EN/02
3/4
GRID
Installation
02--2011
L31--664EN/02
4/4
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Markings
Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the
breaking chambers correspond with those on the column
Time taken for

coupling operation
The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in a

time of 40 min.
NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a minimum
of two people.
T(max) 40 min
Lifting means
Provide an adequate means of

hoisting:
3,000 daN (minimum).
An aerial basket is mandatory.
Stages of the
coupling operation
The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a number of stages:
Step
A
Subject
Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber
Final coupling
09- 2011
H+2m
prohibited.
Page
2
3
5
6
L31- 7138EN/01
1/16
GRID
Installation

Elements required:
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole):
Mark
Assembly
Illustration
Description
Quantity
(50)
Corona shields
(51)
Lugs
(52)
Fittings
H M10-30
Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) without
overtightening.
51
50
x 4
52
Positioning
H M10- 30
Temporarily fit the corona shield (50) to the base of the first isolator on the
column (1).
1
50
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
2/16
GRID
Installation

Elements required:
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation:

Mark
(20)
(21)
Illustration
Description
Quantity
Seal
Screws
H M16- 65 (19 mm)
H M16- 75 (30 mm)
(22)
Washer
M16
16
(23)
Nut
(24)
Coupling pin
(25)
Circlips
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
3/16
GRID
Installation
Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation, continued

Tools required
ALSTOM Grid
List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation:

Mark
Products required
09- 2011
Illustration
Description
Quantity
(30)
(31)
Short centring pin

Long centring pin
(32)
Lever
(33)
Protective mask
(34)
Trolley stop
(35)
Fitting tool for

coupling pin
(37)
Circlip clamp
(not supplied)
S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces

S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place
S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
4/16
GRID
Installation
Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber

Raising the breaking
chambers
Using two slings, lift the chambers and LEVEL THEM, the casing (2) should
be at head height (approximate weight: 700 kg).
Assembling the
centring pins
Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in place
so that they may be easily removed later on.
NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).
A
Depressurizing
the chambers
30
31
S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6)
to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers.
REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 205C
(101.3 kPa).
S Refit the cap (5).
4
5
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
5/16
GRID
Installation
Final coupling
Orientation of the
chambers
To aid later identification of the chambers it is of the utmost important that they
be coupled the right way round.
There are two humps (B1 & B2) on the casing (2).
Set the chambers level with the column (1) so that the humps (B1 & B2) on
the casing (2) are on the same side as the control mounting (3).
B1
2
1
B2
2
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
6/16
GRID
Installation

Removing the
chamber transport
cover
Step
1
Action
Remove the fixings (40) and
insert the lever (32) through
the bracket rings (7).
Pull on the lever (32) to open
the cover (4).
Hold on two two of the cover
bolts (40) for later use.
Illustration
x 8
40
H M16- 55
7
32
2
Start timing.
(The final chamber/column
coupling operations should
be completed in a time of
40 min).
Pull off the cover (4) to free

the stop ring (8) and Rilsan
collar (9).
8
4
4
Using wire cutters, cut

through the Rilsan collar (9)
holding the connector tube
and remove it.
9
5
Using the coupling tool (35),

remove the tube (10) and separate the cover (4) from the
stop ring (8).
10
4
35

09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
7/16
GRID
Installation

Removing the
chamber transport
cover
Step
6
Action
Fit the trolley stop (34) and fix
in place using the bolts (40)
recovered from the transport
cover, hand tightening them.
Illustration
x 2
40
H M16- 55
34
7
Prepare the fitting tool (35)

by screwing the coupling pin
(24) onto its end, hand tightening.
35
24
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
8/16
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
centring pins
Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly
tighten the nuts (41).
Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31).
2
41
41
42
30
42
31
Removing the column The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover:
cover
Step
1
Action
Remove the fittings (43) and
open the cover (11).
Illustration
11
x 8
43
H M16- 55
2
Turn the cover (11) through

90 to remove it.
11

09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
9/16
GRID
Installation

Fitting the seal
The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal:
Step
1
Action
Illustration
A
Fit a new seal (20) and place

it on surface A, referring to
Preparing and fitting
static seals.
20
See
module
General
Fit the protective cover (33).
33
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
10/16
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
coupling pin
Step
1
Action
Slowly lower the breaking
chambers (2), inserting the
centring pins (30) & (31) into
the holes in the column
flange (1).
Make sure both pins are correctly aligned.
Illustration
12
30
31
Slower lower the breaking

chambers (2) to align the pin
with the holes in the cylinder
(8) and the rod (12).
1
Insert the fitting tool (35) with

the coupling pin (24) on its
end.
24
35
Slightly loosen the two

screws holding the trolley
stop (34) in place and
remove it.
34

09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
11/16
GRID
Installation

Fitting the
coupling pin
Step
5
Action
Fit the coupling pin (24) by
manually pulling on the fitting
tool (34) until it stops on the 35
cylinder (8).
Illustration
8
24
Fit the circlips (25), sliding

them along the fitting tool (35) 35
using circlips pliers (37).
See the second method (7).
25
37
Remove the fitting tool (35)

from the coupling pin, loosening it by hand.
Second method:
Fit circlips (25) using circlip
pliers (37).
25
37
35
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
12/16
GRID
Installation

Connection
chambers/column
Step
1
Action
Illustration
Remove the trolley stop fixing

screws (40).
40
Remove the screws (42) from

the centring pins.
42
42
Continue to slowly lower the

breaking chamber, removing
the first two sections of centring pin (30 & 31) when they
are no longer of any use as a
guide, in the following order:
- First section (C)
- Screw (42)
- Second section (B)
NOTE: The aim of this
operation is to prevent the
centring pins coming into
contact with the porcelain
fins on the column.
30
31
(B)
(42)
(C)
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
13/16
GRID
Installation

Connection
chambers/column
Step
4
Action
Slowly lower the breaking
2
chamber casing (2) onto the
column.
Position the lugs (51) for the 52
corona shield (50) on the rim
of the column then attach
using bolts (21), washers (22)
and special nuts (23) - See
Locking Fixings.
See
module
General
x
Tighten all fixings (52) to their

appropriate torque level.
End of coupling operation stop the timer and note the

time taken.
Remove the last section (A)

and the nut (41) from the centring pins.
Fix the last bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23)
referring to Locking fixings.
See
module
General
Illustration
50
23
x6
22
H M10- 30
3,2 daN.m
51
21
H M16- 65 (75)
13,5 daN.m
41
(A)

23
22
22
x2
21
H M16- 65 (75)
13,5 daN.m
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
14/16
GRID
Installation

Vacuum extraction
and
filling with gas
09- 2011
Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with:

S The air extraction operation
S The gas filling operation
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
15/16
GRID
Installation
09- 2011
prohibited.
L31- 7138EN/01
16/16
GRID
Installation
Presentation
Necessary product
Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)
Necessary
ALSTOM Grid
tools
Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(1)
Lifting strap
(6)
Lever
Lifting equipment
Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).
Process
The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the
pole--support :
Step
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Topic
Page
2
3
6
8
10

06--2011
prohibited.
11
12
L31--7902EN/01
1/12
GRID
Installation

Unpacking
Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole
reference numbers are the right ones.
Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :
Circuit--breaker
Open
Necessary
components

Mark
Installing the
necessary
components
Closing spring
Released
Diagram
Designation
Number
(11)
Seal
(22)
Spacer
-- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device.
-- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13).
-- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft
(13).
13
11
x4
22
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
2/12
GRID
Installation

Introduction
For transport the pole is fitted with a securing tool (4) and a safety plate (5),
temporarily attached to the end of the handle (12)
To fit the operating lever, you must:
a -- Remove the securing tool (4).
b -- Manually open the pole.
c --Refit the securing tool (4) (open position).
d -- Remove the safety plate (5).
5
7
12
Grease
Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
3/12
GRID
Installation

Manual opening
operation

Step
1
Action
Remove the securing tool
(4) then screw the operating
lever (6) onto the flange on
the front of the handle
sleeve (12).
Diagram
4
12
6
2
With the help of the lever (6),

effect a 60 rotation of the
sleeve (12).
12
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
4/12
GRID
Installation

Manual opening
operation, continued

Step
3
Action
Put back the blocking tool
(4) on the flange of the
sleeve (12).
NOTE : This tool ensure
the angular positioning of
pole
operating
shaft
during the coupling with
the operating mechanism.
Diagram
M10
6
4
Remove the lever (6).
12
5
Remove the safety plate (5)

and the screws from the
flange on the front of the
handle sleeve (12).
12
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
5/12
GRID
Installation

Necessary
components

Mark
Diagram
Designation
Number
(10)
Washer
M20
(22)
Spacer
(26)
Spacer
(23)
Eccentric spacer
(14)
Nut
H M20
(24)
Wedge (thickness 1 mm)
(25)
Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm)
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
6/12
GRID
Installation
Coupling the operating device, continued

Coupling
The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling :
Step
1
2
3
Action
Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram.
NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device
before slinging.
Lift the operating device and make this level.
Approximate weight 300 kg.
Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that
the cables touch the stress--shields ring).
The final approach must be done with extreme caution.
4
5
Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12)
of the pole operating shaft.
As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) A emerge from the hole
of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26),
washer (10) and the nut (14).
26
14
9
10
8
12
1
17
8
A
13
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
7/12
GRID
Installation

Installing
the fastening nuts
The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening
nuts :
Step
1
3
4
Action
Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower
fastening screw B.
Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on
the upper fastening screws C and D.
NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14).
Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower
edge of the pole--support oblong holes.
Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the fastening screws (9).
23
5 daN.m
10
14
23
x 2
C
9
D
B
14
10
x1
22

06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
8/12
GRID
Installation
Fastening the operating device, continued

Wedging
and tightening
The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws
depending to the X play :
X
22
Important
20
If the X play is ...
X <1 mm
X 1 mm
Lifting strap
24
25
35 daN.m
Action
Tighten to the indicated tightening
torque.
D Wedge between the spacer (22)
and the operating device (20) with the
provided wedges (24)--(25).
D Tighten the screw to the
indicated tightening torque.
Remove the lifting strap.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
9/12
GRID
Installation

Process
REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
10/12
GRID
Installation

Process
Connect up the operating devices wires refer to the wiring diagram of the circuit--breaker.
Connect up the operating devices wires.
NOTE : Use the holes provided on the supports of the frame to fix
the cables.
Connecting up the
contact densimeter
cable
Connect the wires from the electrical contact SF6 densimeter (18) cable (19)
to the operating mechanism terminal block, in accordance with the relative
diagram.
18
19
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
11/12
GRID
Installation

Process
Switch on the permanent heating system of the operating device (in both summer and winter) to avoid condensation, and the corrosion which might result
from this.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE OPERATING MECHANISM MOTOR WITH CURRENT TO AVOID THE CLOSING SPRING BEING RELOADED.
06--2011
prohibited.
L31--7902EN/01
12/12
GRID
GRID
Alstom Grid
-ALSTOM
2010. ALSTOM, the

ALSTOM logo and any alternative
version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other
names mentioned, registered or not, are
the property of their respective
companies. The technical and other data
contained in this document is provided
for information only. Neither ALSTOM,
its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data
or the achievement of any projected
performance criteria where these are
indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to
revise or change this data at any time
without further notice.
Alstom Grid
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
130 rue Lon Blum
69611- Villeurbanne cedex - France
Tel: +33 (0) 4 72 68 34 34
Fax: +33 (0) 4 72 68 34 50
www.alstom.com
GRID

Manual Gl317x Rph2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Gl317x Rph2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Gl317x Rph2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content

SF6 circuit- breaker

This page is intentionally blank.

Description and operation

Description of the interrupting chambers

Pole operation (interrupting principle)

Operating device of circuit- breaker

SF6 gas monitoring

Packaging - Shipping and storage

Erection general procedures

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts

The installation procedure (advised), developed

Supporting frame assembly

Coupling of column and chambers

Installation of terminals with preparation

Installation of stress- shields

Lifting and positioning the pole

Installation of operating device

Continued on next page.

Connection the vacuum pump

Installing the synchronous device RPH2

RPH2 - Correspondence between C.B. poles and

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure

Pre- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Filling with SF6 gas

Pre- commissioning inspections

RES 310 M EN/10

Commissioning check list

RES 310 M RPH2

CAEN 103 271/3/010

Electrical wear limits

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Intervention on the operating device

Product safety sheets

RPH2 - Service manual

Check- list Commissioning

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components

Managing of SF6 gas

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas

Complementary installation procedure

Supporting frame assembly

Lifting and positioning the pole

Installation of terminals with preparation

Installation of stress- shields

Coupling of column and chambers

Installation of operating device

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Circuit-- breaker GL317X with spring operating mechanism FK3-- 5

The circuit--breaker is made up of three poles, each activated by a spring

The table below gives the main parts of the circuit--breaker :

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Pole of the circuit-- breaker

The pole of the circuit--breaker is made up with three main components :

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker